Revit MEP 2010

Imperial Tutorial

March 2009

©

2009 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Filmbox, Fire, Flame, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, Frost, GDX Driver, Gmax, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, LocationLogic, Lustre, Matchmover, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moonbox, MotionBuilder, Movimento, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, REALVIZ, Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage, Softimage|XSI (design/logo), SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Landscape, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo). The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner,Multi-Master Editing, River, and Sparks. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of MoldflowCorp. in the USA and/or other countries: Moldflow, MPA, MPA (design/logo),Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, MPI (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Insight,MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
What is in the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Chapter 2

Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Using the Revit MEP User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Parts of the Revit Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Modifying the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Performing Common Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Chapter 3

Getting Started with MEP Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating an MEP Project . . . . . . . . . . Linking Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying a View Template . Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 30 . 34 . 35 . 35 . 36 . 39 . 40

Creating a Mechanical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Preparing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Placing a Space in an Open Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

v

Placing a Multi-Level Space . . . . . . . Viewing Zones in the System Browser . . Creating Zones on a Single Level . . . . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels . . . Working with the Analytical Model . . . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads . Creating a Zone Color Scheme . . . . . Creating an Airflow Schedule . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 56 . 59 . 60 . 62 . 64 . 69 . 72 . 75

Chapter 5

Designing Mechanical Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Placing Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems . Manually Creating Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 . . 85 . . 92 . . 94 . 102

Chapter 6

Designing a Mechanical Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Adding Mechanical Equipment . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout . . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout . Adding Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting the System . . . . . . . Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 . 114 . 119 . 128 . 142 . 146 . 149 . 151

Creating an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Specifying Electrical Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Defining Required Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Creating Color Fills and Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Chapter 8

Designing an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills . Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . Placing Switches, Junction Boxes, and Receptacles . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Switch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Panel Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 . 177 . 183 . 193 . 200 . 204 . 207 . 211 . 213 . 214

Creating a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Chapter 10

Designing a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Creating a Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

vi | Contents

Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Creating the Cold Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Creating the Hot Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Creating a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Specifying Pipe Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Determining Zone Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Chapter 12

Designing a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Adding Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System . Adding Vertical Supply Piping . . . . . . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 . 284 . 289 . 294 . 299

Documenting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . Creating Dependent Views . . . . . . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 . 308 . 311 . 315

Chapter 14

Working with Annotations and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Creating Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Creating a Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Chapter 15

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail . Creating Detail Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail . . . . . . . . Drafting Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a CAD Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 . 338 . 348 . 353 . 364

Contents | vii

viii .

You also learn how to use the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 user interface to perform common tasks. Finally. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to access the tutorial training files.Introduction In this tutorial. 1 . you learn how to create and set up an MEP project.

2 .

Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. electrical. 3 . fixtures.Using the Tutorials 1 This lesson provides information on how to get started with the Revit® MEP 2010 tutorials. and plumbing engineering workflows. Add basic MEP elements. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit MEP. The technical training facility you design was a product of a design competition in Munich. How the tutorials are organized The tutorials are designed to follow the typical mechanical. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. What is in the Tutorials In these tutorials. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP. Add more detailed modelling elements. and plumbing fixtures. Germany. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. including an overview of the building information model that you design in the tutorials. This building is also used as the model in the Revit® Architecture and Revit® Structure 2010 tutorials. and where to find the training files required to complete the exercises. such as duct. such as mechanical equipment. electrical panels. and piping. You complete the following phases of design: ■ ■ ■ Import the architectural floor plan in either a 2D (DWG) or a 3D (RVT) format. The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles.

Metric: files for users working with metric units. such as templates and families. you can complete any exercise without first completing the preceding exercises. 4 | Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . After completing each exercise. The training files include a starting point for each tutorial exercise. In this exercise. Training files are grouped into 2 folders within the Training folder: ■ ■ Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. to provide a richer and more finished design. but only enough of a system to learn how to use the tools and options in the product. it is recommended that you begin each exercise by opening the training provided. and tags. annotations. You do not design entire systems. The tutorial exercises are designed to be basic and brief. the tutorials are grouped and presented in a recommended order for optimal learning. elements such as additional ductwork and equipment are incorporated into subsequent training files. you learn where the training files are located. Open a training file 1 Click ➤ Open. all content used in the tutorials is installed in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files. NOTE Depending on your installation. Imperial file names have an _i suffix. For example. Each training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. Contact your CAD manager for more information. your Training folder may be in a different location. When you open a training file. However. Use the training files A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. So. the exercises and lessons can be completed in any order. as well as how to open and save them. These elements enhance the exercises you complete. you only draw the duct in one wing of the building. templates. however. views. is located and accessed in the training files location. Create schedules. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials. Accessing Training Files Training files are Revit MEP projects. and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. On the Contents tab. you may notice that MEP elements are included that were not specifically added in an exercise.■ ■ ■ Analyze systems and refine MEP elements. Create detail views. The tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. you can choose to save your work. When you install the training files as instructed. Metric file names have an _m suffix. when you add ductwork. Locate the training files The Tutorials option on the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 Help menu provides a link to the installation website for the tutorial content and training files. they are copied to the default location C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2010\Training. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system. For example. and sheets to document the project.

A training file is provided as a starting point for each exercise. If you click the arrow to the right of the Open option. verify that Project Files (*.NOTE If you click the word Open in the menu. click ➤ Save As. For File name.rvt and make changes. and you can open any supported file type. For Files of type. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Click a file type to display the Open dialog for the specified file type. For example. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name. you should save this file with a new name such as settings_modified. 3 In the right pane. and click Save. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ For Save in. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes.rvt) is selected. You may close the file with or without saving changes. the Open dialog displays. and click Open. 4 Click the training file name. ■ ■ Close a training file 7 Click ➤ Close. depending on the instructions in the tutorial. select the folder in which to save the new file. if you open settings. double-click Imperial or Metric. and click the Training Files icon. a list of file types displays. 8 If you have made changes. NOTE You are not required to save your work in a training file. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location.rvt. Accessing Training Files | 5 . you are prompted to save the changes. enter the new file name. scroll down.

6 .

the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. Understanding the Concepts What is Autodesk Revit MEP 2010? The Revit MEP platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. the operation of the software is parametric. In this case. ■ ■ 7 . Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. quantities. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit MEP is built. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. If you move the partition. If the length of the elevation is changed. every drawing sheet. and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. 2D and 3D view. drawings. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. drawing sheets. the parameter is one of association or connection. hence. scope. You learn the terminology. In this case. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the design that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. the door retains this relationship to the partition. In the Revit MEP model. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. the hierarchy of elements. and plans. and schedules required for a building project. you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work.Understanding the Basics 2 In this lesson. schedules. the floor or roof remains connected. sections. As you work in drawing and schedule views. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. and phases when you need it.

The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works.How does Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. Revit MEP uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. Revit MEP uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. and electrical panels. When you change something. For example. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. For example. ducts. sinks. dimensions. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. For example. boilers. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. ducts. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. Examples include detail lines. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. filled regions. For example. walls and ceilings are hosts. dimensions. For example. Datum elements help to define project context. tags. and reference planes are datum elements. sprinklers. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. and 2D detail components. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. grids. tags. ■ 8 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. They display in relevant views of the design. boilers. They help to describe or document the design. levels. sprinklers. For example. sinks. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. and keynotes are annotation elements. and electrical panels.

However. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. floors. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. some terms are unique to Revit MEP. you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. such as roofs. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. section views. from geometry to construction data. you do nothing to establish these relationships. and drawings of the design. If you can draw. families. elevation views. categories of model elements include mechanical equipment and air terminals. In Revit MEP. and ceilings. schedules. or bottom of foundation. Understanding the Concepts | 9 . Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure.Elevation View Element: When creating a project. This information includes components used to design the model. Most often. Revit MEP classifies elements by categories. Understanding Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common. Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. you must be in a section or elevation view. industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers. first floor. Categories of annotation elements include tags and symbols. by locking a dimension or aligning to walls. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly.This implementation provides flexibility for designers. By using a single project file. To place levels. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. Project: In Revit MEP. views of the project. and so forth). In other cases. top of wall. programming is not required. Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. for example. you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. For example. and types. Often. North . The project file contains all information for the building design. you can explicitly control them.

Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). Parts of the Revit Interface The Revit MEP interface is designed to simplify your workflow. System families can be transferred between projects. ■ ■ ■ Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. identical use. ■ ■ In-place families are custom families that you create in the context of a project. and similar graphical representation. and wires. hiding. However. 10 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . you can change the interface to better support the way that you work. You can create multiple in-place families in your projects. you can create different types of fittings with different compositions. or layer the views to see only the one on top. Create an in-place family when your project needs unique geometry that you do not expect to reuse or geometry that must maintain one of more relationships to other project geometry. although the pendant lights that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. Then experiment with them. ■ Because in-place families are intended for limited use in a project. you can set the ribbon to one of the three display settings for optimum use of the interface. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the design (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). For example. the behavior of a plumbing fitting is predefined in the system. Unlike system and standard component families. System families include ducts. you cannot duplicate in-place family types to create multiple types. A type can be a specific size of a family. such as a 30” X 42” title block. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. pipes. each in-place family contains only a single type. and rearranging interface components to support the way that you work. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. a lighting fixture could be considered one family. Type: Each family can have several types. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. showing. Using the Revit MEP User Interface Revit MEP is a powerful CAD product for the Microsoft® Windows operating system.Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. Its interface resembles those of other products for Windows featuring a ribbon that contains the tools used to complete tasks. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. For example. Read the following topics to familiarize yourself with the basic parts of the Revit interface. For example. A type can also be a style. With a few clicks. There are 3 kinds of families: ■ Loadable families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. You can also display several project views at one time. and you can place copies of the same in-place family element in your projects.

To move panels: ■ ■ Click a panel label and drag the panel to a desired place on the ribbon. Ribbon Tabs and Panels TIP When you see a button that shows a line dividing it into two sides. or moving a panel off the ribbon to your desktop. To return the panel to the ribbon. The ribbon can be minimized for maximum use of the drawing area.Ribbon Overview The ribbon displays automatically when you create or open a file. and provides all the tools necessary to create your file. Minimize to Tabs: Shows tab labels. Customize the ribbon by changing the panel order. or drag the panel back to its original ribbon tab. Click the other side to expose a list of other related tools. 2 The minimize behavior cycles through the following minimize options: ■ ■ ■ Show Full Ribbon: Shows entire ribbon. To minimize the ribbon 1 Click (Show Full Ribbon) to the right of the ribbon tabs. Parts of the Revit Interface | 11 . you can click the top (or left) side to access the tool you probably use most often. click the Return Panels to Ribbon button. Click a panel label and drag the panel off the ribbon to the desktop. Minimize to Panel Tiles: Shows tab and panel labels.

tools used for adding 2D information to a design. When working on the Modify tab. tools to add and manage secondary items such as raster images. many of the tools you need to create the MEP design. tools used for running analysis on the current design.Examples of button that can be clicked on two sides The following table describes the ribbon tabs and the types of commands they contain. and for switching views. architect-specific tools. third-party tools used with Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. The Add-Ins tab is enabled only when a third-party tool is installed. tools used for editing existing elements. select the tool first. Create (family files only) Insert Annotate Modify Analyze Architect Collaborate View Manage Add-Ins 12 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .. tools used for managing and modifying the current view. There are a number of button types on the ribbon Ribbon Tab Home Includes commands for.. and CAD files. and settings. many of the tools you need to create and modify a family of elements. project and system parameters. then select what you want to modify. data and systems. tools for collaboration with internal and external project team members.

A dialog-launcher arrow on the bottom of a panel opens a dialog. when adding duct. Contextual Ribbon Tabs When you execute certain commands or select an element. provides access to common tools. application button application menu Quick Access toolbar InfoCenter Status Bar Parts of the Revit Interface | 13 . an expanded panel closes automatically when you click another panel. Placement Tools: contains the placement tools necessary for placing and connecting duct. To keep a panel expanded. a special contextual ribbon tab displays that contains a set of tools that relate only to the context of the command. displays frequently used tools. a Place Duct contextual tab displays that has three panels: ■ ■ ■ Selection: contains the Modify command.Expanded Panels A drop-down arrow at the bottom of a panel indicates that you can expand the panel to display additional tools and controls. Application Frame Overview The application frame contains tools and provides feedback to help you manage your Revit MEP projects. closes the application menu (double-click). This contextual ribbon tab closes once you end the command. For example. Element: contains Element Properties and the Type Selector. By default. displays information related to the current state of a Revit operation. provides requested information. click the push pin icon in the bottom-left corner of the expanded panel. The application frame consists of five main areas described in the following table: Application Window Tool Description opens the application menu (single -click).

The Application Menu The application menu provides access to many common file actions and also allows you to manage your files using more advanced commands. (Open) save the current drawing. (New) 14 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . click. such as Export and Publish. (Export) On the application menu. Click to access the application menu and perform the following actions: to. Access common tools to start or publish a file in the application menu. select a file to open.. NOTE Revit MEP options are set from Options on the application menu. (Save) save the current drawing with a new name... select a template and create a new drawing. (Save As) export the current drawing..

annotation. cancels the last action by default and displays a list of all actions taken during the session.. provides views including Default 3D. customizes the items displayed on the Quick Access toolbar. click next to it on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. family. or template file. synchronizes a local file with that on the central server. To enable or disable a tool item.On the application menu. Camera. or template file. (Close) Using the Quick Access Toolbar The Quick Access toolbar contains the following items by default: Quick Access Toolbar Item (Open) Description opens a project. click. family. (Save) (Undo) (Redo) (Modify) (Synchronize and Modify Settings) (3D View) (Customize Quick Access Toolbar) Parts of the Revit Interface | 15 . but is not enabled by default. (Publish) print the current drawing. to. annotation. saves a current project. publish the current project. NOTE New displays on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. enters selection mode and ends the current operation. reinstates the last cancelled action and displays a list of all reinstated actions performed during the session. and Walkthrough... (Print) access product and license information.. (Licensing) close the file.

Modify. click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down. Click Show Below the Ribbon on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar to change the display setting. the left side of the Status Bar provides tips or hints on what to do. displaying the same information. Status Bar The Status Bar is located along the bottom of the Revit MEP application frame. these items do not display and need to be re-added to the Quick Access toolbar. To show the Status Bar again. the Status Bar displays the name of the family and type. While in an edit mode (such as Modify Electrical Fixtures). click the drop-down to the right of the Undo and Redo buttons. you can select any number of previous commands to include in the Undo or Redo operation. NOTE There are some tools on contextual tabs that cannot be added to the Quick Access toolbar. a tool tip appears next to the cursor. or View Graphics panels persist on the toolbar for that mode. or the Family Editor. The Quick Access toolbar can display below the ribbon. Active Only: Filters selections to select only active design option components. Clear the Status Bar check mark. However. Several other controls appear on the right side of the Status Bar ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Press & Drag: Allows you to click and drag an element without it selecting first. 16 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . This displays the command history in a list. Starting with the most recent command. In addition. items that are added to the Quick Access toolbar from the Create. workshared components. To hide the Status Bar. Filter button: Displays how many elements are selected and refines the element categories selected in a view. Editable Only: Filters selections to select only editable.To undo or redo a series of operations. When you are using a command. When you are highlighting an element or component. repeat the command. Clipboard. It often displays tips or hints about what to do next for the current command. when you switch to another editing mode. Getting Hints About What to Do Next If you start a command (such as Rotate) and are not sure what to do next. Group. Exclude Options: Filters selections to exclude components that are part of a design option. check the Status Bar.

select one or more elements of the same category. Options Bar The Options Bar is located below the ribbon. To change existing elements to a different type. for example. When you place an element in a drawing. Then use the Type Selector to select the desired type. Place a Wall. including the following: Parts of the Revit Interface | 17 . On the Quick Access toolbar. do either of the following: ■ ■ Press ESC twice. Its contents change depending on the current command or selected element. use the Type Selector to specify the type of element to add.To cancel or exit the current command. Type Selector The Type Selector is located on the Element panel for the currently invoked tool. Its contents change depending on the current function or selected elements. It provides quick access to functions that affect the drawing area. click (Modify). View Control Bar The View Control Bar is located at the bottom of the Revit window above the Status Bar.

For example.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Scale Detail Level Model Graphics Style Shadows On/Off Show/Hide Rendering Dialog (Available only when the drawing area displays a 3D view. 1 Click ➤ Open. 18 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i. (The Navigation bar is located in the top-right corner of the view. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. After you are familiar with these tasks. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the MEP design in the window. In the following steps. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or floor plan in the view. click Training Files.) The zoom menu lists the zoom options.rvt. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Zoom the view In the tutorials. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. There are several ways to access zoom options. Crop View On/Off Show/Hide Crop Region Temporary Hide/Isolate Reveal Hidden Elements Modifying the View In this exercise. you learn how to modify the views within your Revit MEP project. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click Navigation bar ➤ Zoom In Region drop-down to display the zoom menu.

9 To display SteeringWheels. click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. NOTE If the Navigation bar is not currently displayed click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and select Navigation bar. click . the view zooms in on the selected area. this is referred to as a crossing selection. Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. If you do not have a wheel mouse. 6 Click in the drawing area. 8 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). and enter the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the currently-selected zoom command. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. When you release the mouse button. 7 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. on the Navigation bar. To modify or add snap increments. The view of the MEP design is sized to fit the available window. NOTE As you zoom in and out. 5 Click Zoom To Fit. In the drawing area. Modifying the View | 19 . the view zooms out from the mechanical piping design. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. use a zoom menu command to zoom out.

moving the wheel to the desired location. To define settings for SteeringWheels. 12 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. and click tin the Options dialog. For more information about SteeringWheels. click 16 Click the Top compass direction indicator to switch to a Top view of the design. Reorient the view You can use the View Cube in 3D views to spin the design or reorient the view 15 Place the mouse cursor over the South compass portion of the ViewCube to highlight the direction indicator. As you move the mouse. ➤ Options. press ESC. and then using the Zoom tool again. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. 14 To exit the wheel. press F1 while the steering wheel is displayed. click the SteeringWheels tab. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. 10 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. Click and drag to orbit the design. 13 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. 11 Click and hold the mouse button. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. 20 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area.

bottoms. Performing Common Tasks In this exercise.HVAC Plan .17 Click the Home icon to return to the original view. 2 Enter ZR. referred to as shape handles.Design ➤ Floor Plans. After you are familiar with these tasks. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the duct. Similar controls. and select the duct. Resize an element using drag controls 1 In the Project Browser. as shown. and tops of selected elements in elevation views and 3D views. These are the drag controls. When drawing or modifying an MEP design. Performing Common Tasks | 21 . called drag controls. you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials.Design. display at the ends of selected objects in a plan view. and open Level 2 . it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. Small blue dots. display along the ends. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan.

All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). 6 On the Undo menu. 22 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Move. or press CTRL+Z. click the Undo command. you decide that you prefer to leave the duct as is. select the first item in the list. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. on the Standard toolbar. Move an element 7 Select the same duct used in the previous steps. Undo commands 5 On the Quick Access toolbar. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. In this example. 4 Click in the drawing area to deselect the duct. All changes you make to a project are tracked.3 Click and drag the bottom control. moving the cursor up to shorten the duct.

such as Move and Copy. 9 Click the midpoint of the duct. click to specify the starting position. 10 Move the cursor to the right. you want to move the duct. After selecting the element to move.8 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. require 2 clicks to complete the command. and click again to specify the ending position. as shown. Performing Common Tasks | 23 . Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. In this case. for example. The duct is moved to the new position. 11 With the duct already selected. and drag it to the left as shown. Some commands.

End a command Some commands. Click OK. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. Select Mechanical . (Undo) to redisplay the 24 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .Return. Press ESC twice. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 14 Enter VG.Supply. under Visibility: ■ ■ ■ Clear Mechanical . 13 To end a command. Override the display of objects You can control the visibility of objects in a view to display objects in specific ways. 15 On the Filters tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. Notice that the return air duct is not displayed. such as the Modify Ducts command. you can specify visibility settings for specific elements in an HVAC plan in order to enable the display of supply duct and disable the display of return duct. you can also: ■ ■ Choose another command. click the drop-down menu next to supply return air duct. 16 On the Quick Access toolbar. For example.

Performing Common Tasks | 25 .17 Close the file without saving your changes.

26 .

You can either select a template from the template library. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to the other templates. you learn how to start a project from a template. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog.rte template. Finally. select Project. and modify system settings. You can choose from several templates. 4 Select the i_Tutorial-Default. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. click Browse.Getting Started with MEP Projects 3 In this lesson you learn how to start a project from a template. and click Open. New projects inherit all the families. system families. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. click Training files. A project template enables you to start a project by providing initial conditions. link files. You then learn how to customize the template by modifying the project settings and discipline settings. such as coordination review and interference checking. you learn how to organize the project browser to make it easy to view and access your project files. create and manage views. and loadable families. the default building levels and standard views. settings. You also learn how to use collaboration tools. such as the default project units and settings. Start a project from an existing template 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. under Template file. In that case. Creating an MEP Project In this exercise. use copy/monitor. 2 In the New Project dialog. under Create new. or you can save a project and use it as a new project template. 5 In the New Project dialog. 27 . 6 Click OK. such as ducts and pipes. and geometry from the starting template. and open Imperial ➤ Templates.

18 In the Project Parameters dialog. Modify project settings Project settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. Create a new project template based on the default systems template 12 Click ■ ■ ➤ New ➤ Project. 14 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. review the construction materials listed. Some templates are simple with respect to the predefined views and schedules. For Location. click Browse. for Energy Data. For example. you can select it now. In the Choose Template dialog. If you want to use a template other than the default. for City. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). 17 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. 9 Close the file with or without saving it. select Manchester. zoom to right side of the drawing area to view the level heads. navigate to Imperial Templates. NH. select School or University. select Project template. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog.7 In the Project Browser. select Level 1. 28 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 11 Close the file with or without saving it. 13 In the New Project dialog: Under Template file. Click OK. and select the Systems-Default_Imperial. ■ ■ Under Create new. click ■ ■ In the Building Construction dialog. In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ On the Place tab. When you select the material. ■ For Building Construction. and open North. Notice that construction template is more complex than the default template and the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. (Browse). TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. click Edit. click (Browse). 10 Using the same method. select Sub-Discipline and click Modify. under Energy Analysis. 8 In the drawing area. ■ ■ For Ground Plane. 16 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Building Type.rte template and click Open. create another new project using the Construction template. you can select the materials commonly used in most projects. Click OK twice. Click Cancel.

Discipline settings can be defined for electrical and mechanical disciplines. under Pipe Settings. 23 In the left pane. 25 In the left pane.rfa and I_Long Wire Tick Mark. select Views. Duct sizes that are not commonly used are removed from the sizing lists to avoid having them created when sizing or laying out ducts. For Categories. 10 1/2". 27 Click OK. 32 In the right pane: ■ ■ ■ For Hot Wire Tick Mark. Modify electrical settings Electrical settings determine the voltage. Click OK twice. and demand factors for electrical systems. under Duct Settings. 24 In the right pane. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. 33 Click OK. select I_Hook Wire Tick Mark. Creating an MEP Project | 29 . clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. click Rectangular. 28 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. Mechanical settings determine the behavior and appearance of the ductwork and piping for mechanical. For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. and 12 1/2". For Ground Wire Tick Mark. Holding CTRL. and fire protection systems. 4 1/2". clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. for 3/4". 22 In the right pane. ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. for 3 1/2". 29 In the Load Family dialog: ■ ■ Browse to the Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks folder. and 5 1/2". 4 1/2". Modify mechanical settings Revit MEP has discipline settings that define the appearance and behavior of the system components in a project. they can be configured in a template file to avoid having to set them for each project. plumbing. Define the tick marks that are used on wires by loading a family.19 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Group parameter under. After standard settings have been established for an organization. ensure that Hook Wire Tick Mark is selected. power distribution systems. 31 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. 5 1/2". piping. click Sizes. 11 1/2". for 3 1/2". ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. click Round. under Duct Settings. 30 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. 21 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. select Identity Data. 26 In the right pane. click Wiring.rfa and click Open. 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. wiring.

4 In the New Project dialog. select Type/Discipline and click Edit. you link the architectural model with the MEP model. 34 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and click Browser Organization. In addition. 7 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. You can use these techniques to create templates that are customized to your projects. click Browse. select Auto . For Sort by. Select Imperial\Arch Link Model_i. Close coordination between the two models is essential because the building envelope changes will directly affect the MEP design.Organize the Project Browser The Project Browser lists all the views. 3 Select the template you saved in the previous exercise and click Open. select View Name. Notice that the file is saved as a template. An architect has created a preliminary architectural model for a building project using Revit Architecture. 2 In the New Project dialog. Link a file 6 Click Insert tab ➤ Link panel ➤ Link Revit. 38 Close the file. For Then by. You can also set filters to determine the number of views and sheets that are displayed. under Template file. you can specify the order in which the views and sheets are displayed in the Project Browser. You need to create the MEP model for the project. Select Ascending Click OK twice.rvt. under Create new. select Associated Level. families. 35 On the Views tab of the Browser Organization dialog. synchronize the two models for monitoring changes. To enable this coordination. For Then by. From the Positioning list. select Project. click Training. 37 Save this file to a location on your local system. and adjust the display settings of the Revit Architecture project. 36 On the Folders tab of the Browser Organization Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Group by. select Sub-Discipline. sheets. you link a Revit Architecture project to a Revit MEP project. select Family and Type. You can customize the organization of project views and sheets in the Project Browser to group them into folders. and groups that are contained in a project. 5 Click OK. 30 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . Click Open. Create a new project using the template created in the previous lesson 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project.Origin to Origin. Linking Projects In this exercise.

The architectural model links to the MEP model and the current view remains active. 8 If necessary, reposition elevations in the plan view as shown.

Enable bounding elements for spaces 9 In the drawing area, select the linked architectural model. 10 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 11 In the Type Properties dialog, under Constraints, select Room Bounding. 12 Click OK. 13 Press ESC to deselect the linked model. Add levels 14 Expand Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? and open North - Mech. 15 Zoom to the right side of the building to view the levels.

Linking Projects | 31

16 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. 17 On the Options Bar, click Plan View types. 18 In the Plan View Types dialog, verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected and click OK. 19 On the left side of the view, click the level line for 03- Floor. 20 Move the cursor to the right side of the view and click to insert the level line for Mechanical 3. 21 Repeat the previous steps to create another level line for the roof. 22 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Adjust level lines You can adjust the level lines in the MEP design to match the level lines in the architectural model. 23 Select the level line for Level 2 and click the value.

24 Enter 12 and press ENTER. 25 Repeat the previous steps to adjust the level line for Level 2.

32 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Monitor the architectural levels You can monitor the elements within a Revit MEP model, and when the monitored elements are not synchronized, warnings notify you of any violations. These violations happen when the original monitored element from the linked project has changed, a copied monitored element in the host project has changed, or both original monitored and copied elements have changed. Warnings may also appear when the original element in the linked file is deleted or the copied element in the host file is deleted. Using the Copy/Monitor tool, you can copy elements within a current project or from a linked project to a host project. This establishes a relationship between the copied and original elements, which helps monitor changes to the original element and report differences. After copying, appears above the copied elements, indicating that a relationship is established, and that the copied elements are monitored. If you modify a monitored element, a warning message displays, indicating that an element has changed. 26 Click Collaborate tab ➤ Coordinate panel ➤ Copy/Monitor drop-down ➤ Select Link. 27 In the drawing area, highlight the linked model, and click to select the linked model. The Copy/Monitor tab is displayed. 28 Click Copy/Monitor tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Monitor. 29 In the drawing area, click the MEP level line labeled Level 1, then click the architectural model level line labeled 01-Entry Level. appears and the monitor tool ensures that both level lines remain coordinated. 30 Repeat the previous steps to monitor the level lines for level 2, level 3, and the level 4. 31 On the Copy/Monitor tab, click Finish to exit the Copy/Monitor tool. Disable the display of architectural levels 32 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 33 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click By Host View. 34 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 35 On the Annotation Categories tab:

For Annotation Categories, select Custom.

Linking Projects | 33

■ ■ ■

Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Levels. Click OK.

36 Click OK.

Creating and Applying a View Template
In this exercise, you create a view template and apply it to your project template. Create a view template 1 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ View Templates drop-down ➤ Create template from current view. 2 In the New View Template dialog, for Name, enter Mechanical View and click OK. 3 In the View templates dialog, under View Properties, for V/G Overrides RVT Links, click Edit. 4 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click Custom. 5 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 6 On the Model Categories tab:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Model Categories, select Custom. Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Parking, Planting, Roads, Site, and Topography. Click OK.

7 Click OK twice. Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser, right-click Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? ➤ North - Mechanical and click Apply View Template.

34 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

9 In the Apply View Template dialog, under View Templates, select Mechanical and click OK.

10 Close the file with or without saving your changes.

Modifying System Settings
In this exercise, you learn how to control the system settings for Revit MEP. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects; they are not saved to project files or template files.

Modifying General System Options
In this exercise, you modify the settings that control your local Revit MEP working environment. These settings control the graphics, selection default options, notification preferences, journal cleanup options, and your username when using worksharing. Set graphics settings 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab. 3 Under Colors, select Invert background color, and click OK. 4 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new project.

5 In the New Project dialog, under Template file, click Browse. 6 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default.rte. 7 Click OK. Notice that the drawing area is black. 8 Click ➤ Options.

9 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab.

Modifying System Settings | 35

10 Under Colors, click the value for Selection color. 11 In the Color dialog, select yellow, and click OK. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. When an error occurs, the elements causing the error display using this color. 12 Click the General tab. 13 Under Notifications, specify the following options:
■ ■

For Save reminder interval, select One hour. For Tooltip assistance, select None.

14 Click OK. 15 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 16 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. 17 Press ESC to end the command. 18 Select the wall.

Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. However, the Status Bar displays information about the highlighted element. 21 Close the file without saving it.

Specifying File Locations
In this exercise, you specify default file locations. These settings control locations of important Revit MEP files, including your default project template, family template files, and family libraries. Set file locations 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the File Locations tab. 3 Under Default template file, click Browse.

36 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template.

TIP To view a template, you can start a new project with that template. Click and click Browse to select a template. 4 Click Cancel. 5 Under Default path for user files, click Browse.

➤ New ➤ Project,

6 In the Browse For Folder dialog, select the folder to save your files to by default, and click Open. 7 In the Options dialog, under Default path for family template files, click Browse. This path is set automatically during the installation process. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. However, there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path, such as in a large, centralized, MEP firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. 8 Click Cancel. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog, click Places. 10 In the Places dialog, note the list of library names. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. Each library path points Revit MEP to a folder of families or training files. You can modify the existing library names and path, and you can create new libraries. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open, Save, Load, and Import dialogs.

When you are opening, saving, or loading a Revit MEP file, you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. In the following illustration, notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog.

Specifying File Locations | 37

38 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . and click OK twice. 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit MEP projects. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. 15 Under Library Name. templates. click (Add Value). and change the name to My Library. Save. or families. and Import dialogs. and select it as the library path.11 In the Places dialog. ➤ Open. and click Open. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. click My Library. click the My Library icon. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. Load. 16 Click 17 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. and click (Browse). The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open.

(Remove Value) to delete the library. 13 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. click Edit. 3 Under Settings. 22 Select My Library. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. select Ignore words in uppercase. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. 5 In the text editor. 2 In the Options dialog. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit MEP. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. 15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. If you want to relocate this path. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. custom color files. This path is determined during installation. and decal image files. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. click Places. Modify spelling settings 1 Click ➤ Options. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. Specify rendering settings 25 Click the Rendering tab. specify the new location here. enter sheetmtl-Cu. 27 Click OK. 19 Click Cancel. 20 Click ➤ Options. 26 Under Render Appearance Library Location.Notice that Revit MEP navigates directly to the library path. 21 On the File Locations tab. click OK. Specifying Spelling Options | 39 . such as bump maps. 14 Click in the drawing area. 9 In the text editor. click Edit. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Spelling. scroll down to view the list of building industry terms. view the current path. click the Spelling tab. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. 23 Click 24 Click OK. If you work in a large office. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. 11 In the Options dialog. 12 Create a new project using the default template.

click Close.. 24 In the Options dialog. In this exercise. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. 2 In the New Project dialog. click Edit. You can turn snap settings on and off. 20 Under Settings. and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. Revit MEP uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. under Dimension Snaps. click Browse. 6 In the Snaps dialog. 21 Under Personal dictionary. 25 Close the file without saving it. Modify snap increments 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit MEP project. 22 In the text editor. work with snapping turned off. click OK. delete sheetmtl-CU. click the Spelling tab. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. 19 In the Options dialog. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. under Template file. and enter 1 . 23 In the text editor. 18 Click ➤ Options. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. click Training Files. 4 In the New Project dialog. As you zoom in and out within a view. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 4’ . and then click File menu ➤ Exit. 40 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . click OK. you modify snap increments. click Restore Defaults. 5 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. click File menu ➤ Save. you modify snap settings. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise.rte.17 In the Spelling dialog. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog.

10 On the Options Bar. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall. This is the increment that you added previously. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. If it does not. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. such as ZO to zoom out. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. For example. use the wheel button on your mouse. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. deselect Chain. If you do not have a wheel button. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. TIP To zoom while sketching. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. Modifying Snap Settings | 41 . and move the cursor to the right. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 1’.7 Under Object Snaps. click OK. 8 In the Snaps dialog. zoom out until it does so. While sketching. enter SM. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. snapping reverts to the system default settings. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 4’ increments. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. 9 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. Notice that when snapping is turned off completely.

. and the wall edges. it will snap to the endpoints. the midpoint. 42 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . and delete the value 1’ . 19 Enter SM.14 Click to set the wall endpoint. 23 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. Do not set the wall end point. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. 24 Under Dimension Snaps. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 Click Place Wall tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. with or without saving it. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. 21 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. 20 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. If you move the cursor along the wall. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. 17 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. Notice that snapping is once again active. and specify the wall endpoint. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. 18 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. 26 Close the file. 25 Click OK. and move the cursor to the right. 22 Move the cursor downward.

Creating a Mechanical System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan mechanical systems. 43 . You also learn how to design a mechanical air system and a mechanical piping system.

44 .

and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. By following the recommended workflow. After finishing each exercise. you will understand the process. you first plan the system. If the tutorial training files are not present. After applying a color scheme to the zones. you can choose to save your work. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. water source heat pump (WSHP). you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and cooling requirements for the building. you prepare a floor plan so that you can place spaces in later exercises. you design a mechanical system for an office building. and then you create a plenum level. you begin planning the system by placing spaces in the building. go to http://www.Planning Mechanical Systems 4 In this tutorial. In this exercise. However. Because most MEP engineers work with a linked model during system design.autodesk. At the end of the tutorial. As you create the mechanical system. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. Preparing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. This system consists of a cooling tower. In this lesson. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. This workflow begins with system planning and concludes with system designing. you learn best practices for system design while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient. Then you assign zones to the spaces in order to control the spatial environment. duct system and a hydronic piping system. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended system design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. methodology. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. you first configure the linked architectural model. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. 45 . This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. To create a mechanical system in Revit MEP.

NOTE When working with a linked file. and floors) recognized as boundaries for spaces. under Constraints. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_01_i. indicating that it’s the active view. not in the MEP training file. The status bar located at the bottom of the window and the tooltip indicate the Linked Revit Model. you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. roof. 2 Place the cursor over the linked model. 3 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the building to create an accurate analytical model and achieve an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. Next. Add a Plenum level You create plenum levels so that you can place spaces in the unoccupied plenum areas (between the ceiling and the floor above) of the building. The linked model is configured to place spaces using the linked building geometry to define the space volume. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . In this section. 4 In the Type Properties dialog.Space Plan is highlighted. 5 Press Esc to clear the selection. select Room Bounding.rvt. and click OK. click Training Files. click to select it. and after the linked model highlights. This makes the architectural components (such as walls. make certain that architectural elements (such as walls. and ceiling) are defined as room-bounding. you add a level for plenums. These components are defined in the architectural training file. 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. ceilings. Configure the linked model for space bounding The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. 46 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .

A black datum indicates a reference level (the level is not taken into account during the creation of a view template). click 10 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ (Line).MEP. 13 Zoom in on the right side of the elevation view. Click the right endpoint of the Level 2 line. and double-click West . Because you have not yet specified the view classification or sub-discipline properties. verify that only Floor Plan is selected. click Yes (this will happen every time you create a new level). and in the Plan View Types dialog. and is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. 15 When asked to rename the corresponding level and views. A new plenum floor plan view named Level 2 Plenum is created. 14 Double-click the level name (Level 4).Design ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). 16 Press Esc. Click Plan View Types. offset by the Offset value (8' 0" ) above level 2. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. Preparing Spaces | 47 . 12 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 8 Click Place Level tab ➤ Element panel.6 In the Project Browser. This creates only a floor plan after the level is added. ■ 11 Draw a plenum level above Level 2 as follows: ■ ■ Click the left endpoint of the Level 2 line to specify the start point of the plenum level. The new level is placed. 9 On the Draw panel. and select Level : Plenum from the Type Selector drop-down. and click OK. and enter Level 2 Plenum. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ MEP . Verify that Make Plan View is selected. enter 8'. those categories in the Project Browser are listed as question marks. and a blue datum indicates that a plan view exists for the level. For Offset.

This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. you can choose to save your work. ■ Click OK twice. for View Scale. For Sub-Discipline. However. and for Offset. you place spaces in areas of the building model. The Level 2 Plenum floor plan is now listed under MEP . right-click Level 2 Plenum. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. Apply a view template 19 Open the Level 2 Plenum view. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. you use space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area. 48 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . for Default View Template. enter 0. For Cut plane.Modify plenum properties 17 In the Project Browser. for View Range. select Level Above (Level 3). This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. Under Extents. for Level. verify that 1/8" = 1'-0" is selected. For View Classification.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. for Top. 20 In the Project Browser. enter an Offset of 1' 0". verify that Associated Level (Level 2 Plenum) is specified with an offset of 0. NOTE After finishing each exercise. click Edit. select Design. Under Identity Data. You apply the default view template so that only the architectural floor plan displays. select MEP . Notice that the site plan displays in the view. and then place spaces in various types of areas. In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. Placing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. right-click Level 2 Plenum. In this exercise. and click Properties. and click Apply Default View Template. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. The view graphics are modified based on the template applied.Plenum. Under View Depth. In the next exercise. In this exercise. select Plenum Plan. you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view in preparation of placing spaces. it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the training file that Autodesk provides.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. For Space. Placing Spaces | 49 . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_02_i. You can also use the Highlight Boundaries feature to view boundary elements in the model. select New. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . indicating that it’s the active view.rvt. For (Tag Location). For Upper Limit. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. 2 Zoom to the empty room to the left of the corridor. select Level 2 Plenum. Place a space 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Place the cursor in the room until the space snaps to the room-bounding elements (floor. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. This specifies the vertical extent of the space. walls. select Horizontal. ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is cleared. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. and ceilings).Space Plan is highlighted. For Offset. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. Spaces can be created automatically and numbered in sequence by using the Create Automatically tool. enter 0.

Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. for Number. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 13 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. 10 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. Prepare the plenum view 12 Open Design ➤ MEP .7 Click to place the space. 9 Select the space. enter Library. For Name. ■ 11 Press Esc to clear the selection. The software automatically zooms the new view to the same location as in the open view. 50 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . double-click the section head in the Library to open the section view (Section 26). 8 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. enter 219. 14 In the drawing area. ensuring coordination between the files. Notice that the space number and name now match the room number and name from the linked architectural file. Click OK.

19 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. For Offset. Placing Spaces | 51 . change the space name to Plenum and the number to 219P. enter 0. select Level 3. 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. and then click Modify. Place a space in the plenum 16 Click in the Level 2 Plenum floor plan to activate it. 21 Using the method learned previously. Notice that the space is created in the section view at the same time. 20 Click in the Library to place the space. 18 Select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. For Upper Limit. demonstrating the parametric functionality of the software.15 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.

25 Close the file with or without saving it. 24 Notice that the floor plan has updated with the changes.22 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Energy Analysis. 23 Click OK. you place a space in a large corridor area. This is beneficial to split up large volumes for equipment selection and sizing. 52 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . select Plenum and verify that Occupiable is cleared. and then split the space using a space separation line. Placing a Space in an Open Area In this exercise.

6 Click above the top stair to place the corridor space. Place a space in an open area 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 5 On the Options Bar. and then press Esc. and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. enter 0.Space Plan is highlighted. select Level 3. 2 Zoom in to the central corridor near the stairs. for Upper Limit. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. indicating that it’s the active view. and for Offset. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_03_i. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 53 . verify that Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt.

If you had modified the name and number in the schedule view instead. 9 In the floor plan. and scroll to the newly placed space.7 In the Project Browser. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Schedule. change the space number to 216A. double-click the space name. notice the corresponding architectural room name and number. as shown. which was numbered 219Q. 11 Close the schedule view. and press Enter. 12 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space Separator. the plan view would have updated with the changes. In the schedule. 14 Click perpendicular to the opposite curtain wall to end the horizontal separation line. and double-click the title of the plan view to maximize the view. 13 To specify the start point of the separation line. 10 Using the same method. 8 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 54 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . enter Corridor. and notice that the schedule updates with the changes. click the endpoint of the lower wall in space Instruction 221.

Notice the changed boundaries of the corridor space. place a space in the lower area of the split space. The new space is numbered correctly (216B). with an upper limit of Level 3 and an offset of 0.15 Press Esc twice. 18 Close the file with or without saving it. 17 Change the name of the space to Corridor. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 55 . 16 Using the method learned previously.

Add a multi-level space 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. Shading is a visual indication of where spaces have been placed (shaded) and where they need to be placed (empty). verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . click (Flip Section) to reorient the section. Click in the Male restroom to specify the section endpoint. and place a section in the view as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the Cafeteria space to specify the section start point. and change the upper limit to account for the entire volume of the chase. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_04_i. Use the lower drag control to change the section boundary as shown.Placing a Multi-Level Space In this exercise. you place a space in a chase.Space Plan is highlighted. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Zoom to the chase between the male (226) and female (225) restrooms in the north wing. 56 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . click Training Files. indicating that it’s the active view. If necessary.

and click Element Properties. Notice that you can see the space in the section view as well as in the plan view. ■ ■ 14 Click OK. 5 Double-click the section head to open the section view.4 Press Esc. 8 Enter WT to tile the views. select the space. right-click. 12 Click in the section view. 10 In the plan view. For Limit Offset. for Name. 7 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. enter 0. 6 Enter VG. select Level 3. 11 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 57 . but that the space does not fill the entire chase. You enter a value that is above the level of the roof. and then click OK. select Interior and Reference. select Roof Level. 13 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Constraints. For Number. enter Chase. add a space: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. expand Spaces. click in the chase area to place the space. enter 225PC. On the Options Bar. for Upper Limit. enter 4'. For Offset. 9 Zoom each view as necessary in order to view the chase. for Upper Limit. In the plan view. Under Identity Data.

In the next exercises. ceilings. you work with zones in order to control the spatial environment and perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. Tag spaces 16 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . You have created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view. All spaces in the view are tagged. floors.Bounding elements (such as walls. 58 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 19 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. 17 Type ZF. 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All.Space Plan. and roofs) define the extent of space volume used in calculations. 15 Press Esc. and you placed spaces for various types of areas. under Loaded Tags. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. the space displays the volume up to the roof only. and maximize the view. You used space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area that was part of a larger area. select Space Tag With Volume. Because the chase space is limited by a bounding element. and click OK.

Zones allow you to control the spatial environment and to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_01_i. The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area. click Training Files. click Reference. which removes the space from the Default zone. and verify that All Disciplines is selected. The browser is a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones to which they have been assigned. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. you view and verify zones in the System Browser. indicating that it’s the active view. 1 In the Project Browser. Notice that Default is currently the only zone. In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan.Zoning is highlighted. To display space reference lines. You can change the Occupiable parameter for each space. Revit MEP immediately adds them to the Default zone. click View ➤ Zones. After a space is placed in an area. it is automatically added to the Default zone. The recommended workflow is to add each space to a zone that you create. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The different graphics in the System Browser indicate whether a space is occupiable ( unoccupiable ( ). Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. 3 Right-click in the System Browser. NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone. 4 Double-click Default to display a list of the spaces in the building model. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.rvt.Viewing Zones in the System Browser After spaces are placed in the building. ) or Viewing Zones in the System Browser | 59 . under Spaces.

Next. you assign spaces to zones in the building. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 In the drawing area. the Edit Zone tab displays. you assign spaces to a zone. 3 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. you can add or remove a space from the zone. and click Finish Editing Zone. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Assign spaces to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. select Occupiable. 60 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and a new zone is created. and Electrical 220 spaces. click Reference. To display space reference lines. you will use the System Browser to confirm that the spaces are in the new zone. The new zone is listed in the System Browser. and verify the zones in the System Browser. Creating Zones on a Single Level In this exercise.Zoning is highlighted. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_02_i. You work with a single zone until you click Finish. indicating that the space is occupiable. click Training Files. As you do this. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog.rvt. The graphic in the System Browser updates. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. and click OK. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone.5 In the System Browser. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. select Computer Lab 222. double-click 121 Cafeteria. and modify the zone properties. Instruction 221. NOTE The Edit Zone tab provides zone tools and information. under Energy Analysis. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Using the Edit Zone tab. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. The Zone tool is active. under Spaces. indicating that it’s the active view.

you need to activate the zone visibility. type VG. 6 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog: ■ ■ Under Visibility.In the System Browser. and then select only Interior Fill and Reference Lines (clear Boundary and Color Fill). Instruction. The zone reference line indicates that the 3 spaces are in the zone. and Electrical spaces are added to it (and removed from the Default zone). Creating Zones on a Single Level | 61 . To view the zone in the drawing area. expand the new zone and notice that the Computer Lab. select HVAC Zones. Expand HVAC Zones. Click OK. 5 With the drawing area active. ■ The new zone displays with color fill and a zone reference line.

3 Open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. 9 In the System Browser.Zoning is highlighted. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_03_i. click Finish Editing Zone. Rename the zone 7 Select the zone. for Name. you assign spaces on multiple levels to a zone in the building. you can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better view the spaces that are in the zone. under Spaces.Area B to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it. and then click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Zone Properties. under Identity Data. Create a zone for spaces on multiple levels 1 In the Project Browser. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. you assigned zones to spaces that were on the same level of the building. 62 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .Area B. expand 2 . 11 Close the System Browser. and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and in the System Browser. 10 On the Edit Zone tab. In this exercise. To display space reference lines. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .TIP After you finish editing the zone. 4 Enter WT to tile the 2 windows. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan.West .West . indicating that it’s the active view.Zoning. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels In this exercise. You activated zone visibility in the views. 2 Zoom in to Lounge 215 (to the right of the central stairs). 12 Close the file with or without saving it. and click OK. and verify the zone in the System Browser. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Reference. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt. enter 2 .

10 Click Finish Editing Zone. 7 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels | 63 . Select Attached End.Zoning view. and then select the tag so that you can use the drag control to move it as desired. Tag a zone 11 Activate the Level 1 . 13 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is selected.Zoning floor plan. 14 Click in the Lounge space to tag the associated zone. 6 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. 9 With the Add Space tool active. and add the Lounge 215 space to the zone. Verify that the distance is 1/2". 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. click in the Level 2 . 15 Press Esc.Zoning view to activate it.Zoning view. select Lounge 120 to add it to the zone. zoom out. 8 In the Level 1 .5 Click in the Level 1 .

and click OK. 18 Press F9 to display the System Browser. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. Because the heating and cooling loads calculations have not been performed. on the ViewCube.Zoning to make it the active view. and zone information. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_01_i. 64 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . under Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans. Working with the Analytical Model In this exercise. the tag displays “Not Computed” for those values. you verify the building. Verify building information 1 In the Project Browser. space. You can expand the zone in the System Browser to view the spaces in it. and Left corners converge to orient the model as shown.The tag only displays in the view where it was placed. click the corner where the Top. View a space 3 In the preview pane of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. In this exercise. you created a zone for spaces on different levels of the building. Rename the zone 16 In the Level 1 . double-click Level 1 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.East. double-click the zone tag. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. for Name Value. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. and view graphical representations of the spaces to verify space boundaries and volumes. 17 In the Change Parameter Values dialog. enter Lounge .rvt.Zoning view. Front.

Next. NOTE Wireframe displays the volume of a space measured by the interior boundaries. The space for 109 Lounge highlights in red. The Details tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been assigned to them. With 109 Lounge selected. The Isolate tool allows you to verify one or more spaces even if they are usually obstructed by other spaces or by the building architecture. you isolate the space. Right-click in the preview pane to access pan and zoom commands. 5 On the Details tab: ■ Expand 1_South_Lounge. ■ TIP You can use the ViewCube to spin/reorient the view.4 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane). verify that Wireframe is selected. The space displays while all other spaces are hidden. You can also view a space in relation to the other spaces or architecture in the entire building. you can verify that the space boundaries are as you defined them. ■ Working with the Analytical Model | 65 . ■ Click to deactivate the Highlight tool. Click (Highlight). and select 109 Lounge. Using the Highlight tool. click (Isolate).

This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space. verify that <Default> is selected for Occupancy and Heat Gain (per person). and then click OK. and in the Electrical Loads dialog. click . 6 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool. Below the list of spaces and zones. the space information displays for the selected space. These specify the space usage and construction materials for the space. verify that <Building> is selected. Verify space information 7 On the Details tab. and in the People dialog. This specifies the number of people or the area per person for the space. You can use the Space Type Settings dialog to adjust settings as necessary. For Construction Type. Revit MEP provides default settings for space types.■ On the Details tab. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the zone. click . and click OK. ■ ■ ■ Next. For Electrical Loads. and then click OK. All spaces in the zone display in isolation. 8 Verify the space information: ■ For Space Type. select 109 Lounge. click . scroll down in the left pane. Next. verify that <Default> is selected for Lighting Values and for Power Values. and in the Space Type Settings dialog. For People. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the space. select 1_South_Lounge. select Lounge/Recreation. 66 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .

00 °F : 90. roofs. Next. verify that 70. 13 Deactivate the Isolate tool. floors.00 °F : N/A is specified. verify that <Building> is selected. For Cooling Information. NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space. For Heating Information. This indicates the heating set point. This indicates the outdoor air per person. and dehumidification set point. you use the Shading view to examine the inner volume of the model for voids. Below the list of spaces and zones. click (Shading). This indicates the cooling set point. heating air temperature. and humidification set point. and zoom to the corner of the building as shown. 12 Using the methods learned previously. outdoor air per area. ■ ■ For Outdoor Air Information. The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces of walls.Verify zone information 9 Select 1_South_Lounge. you allow the values to be calculated by the loads engine. View the shaded model 11 On the View Selector.00 °F : 54. 10 Verify the zone information: ■ ■ For Service Type. the zone information displays for the selected zone. NOTE By not specifying values for the humidification set point and dehumidification set point. verify that 74.00 °F : N/A is specified. This is usually preferable to indicating a particular percentage for those parameters. and air changes per hour. highlight and isolate the space for 109 Lounge to view its inner volume. and other room-bounding components. Working with the Analytical Model | 67 . cooling air temperature. verify that N/A : N/A : N/A is specified.

Add a space to fill a void 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. Modify space properties 19 Select the space. enter 212P. 68 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and then click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 16 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. select the zone that includes all plenum spaces for Level 2 (named 2_Plenum). notice that Condition Type is Heated and Cooled. it doesn’t need to be included in the heating and cooling loads analysis. For Offset. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Upper Limit. Notice that Condition Type updates to Unconditioned. 18 Click in the empty plenum area to place the space. select Level 3. ■ ■ Add the plenum space to a zone 21 In the drawing area. For Name. select Plenum. select Plenum. click Cancel. 15 In the Project Browser. Under Energy Analysis. open MEP . Click OK.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum.Notice that there is a void in a second-floor plenum space. Because this is an unoccupied space. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. enter 0. Under Energy Analysis. for Number.

Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 69 . enter 03101. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. For Location. The report that is the result of this analysis allows you to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. you specify project settings that affect heating and cooling. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_02_i. and zone information. On the Place tab. NH. and you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis. For Postal Code. 4 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. 25 Open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. and then click In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ ■ . 24 Click Finish Editing Zone.rvt. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads In this exercise. is selected. under Energy Analysis.22 Click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Zone panel ➤ Edit Zone. click in the Value field. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 23 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. click Edit. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and select space Plenum 212P. space. for City. you verified building. and verify that the space has replaced the void. Select Automatically adjust the clock for daylight savings changes.Space Plan. In this exercise. select School or University. for Energy Data. verify that Manchester. Specify project settings 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 2 . and viewed the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. 3 In the Instance Properties dialog. click Training Files.

70 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . For Condition Type. 6 On the Computations tab of the Area and Volume Computations dialog.When the location is in an area that observes Daylight Savings Time. verify that Occupiable is selected. you need to select this option. for Values. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Space Type Settings dialog. select Specified. 7 Zoom in to the center area of the building. or neither. right-click. and click Element Properties. For Ground Plane. verify that Use closest weather station (Manchester Airport) is selected. For Project Phase. verify that Simple with Shading Surfaces is selected. For People. for Building Service. select Library . Click OK twice. In the People dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Occupancy. and click OK. and enter 50 sq. select space Library 219. verify that Areas and Volumes is selected (default setting). and then click . both. and click OK. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify area and volume setting 5 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Area and Volume Computations. under Volume Computations. For Space Type. ■ In the Type Properties dialog. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Energy Analysis. NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected in order to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. and click OK. This is the parameter that determines whether a space is included in a heating load. click in the Value column. enter 200 Btu/h. a cooling load. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is specified. enter 150 Btu/h. verify that <Building> is specified. verify that 1' 0" is specified. Under Heat Gain (per Person). select Heated and cooled. 8 In the drawing area. If. Select Area per person. this option adjusts the times automatically. In order to select a space. For Export Complexity. for Values. select Specified. verify that New Construction is selected. ■ On the Weather tab. For Latent. you receive a message that the Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate. For Sliver Space Tolerance. verify that Level 1 is selected.Audio Visual. after opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool. click Edit. ft. For Building Construction. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. For Sensible. first highlight it using the cursor so that the space crossing lines display.

See Help for more information about the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool and its calculation methods. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Building Construction dialog). 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. Various factors (such as analytical and inner volumes of the spaces) are analyzed as Revit MEP performs the heating and cooling loads analysis. is specified. For Electrical Loads. verify the settings specified earlier: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. 11 On the General tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. for Values. Click OK twice. it should be corrected before you calculate loads. If a (Warning) displays for any space in the building. Select the space associated with the warning. select Actual. click Information). and can be modified here. You have verified the building information. select 219 Library. verify that Manchester. For Building Construction. you view the space and zone volumes in the building model. Revit MEP stores this information as project information. (Zone Heating ■ In the Heating Information dialog. and click to learn the cause for the warning. Under Power. 13 Under 2_Middle_Library. For Location. The information for the space that you entered in the Element Properties dialog displays. verify that School or University is selected. verify that <Building> is specified. click Edit. There should be no warnings displayed. (opens the IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. If you have made changes to settings in the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. verify that Heating Set Point is 70°F . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 71 .■ ■ ■ Click OK. NH. click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. 12 Click the Details tab. select Actual. for Values. In the Electrical Loads dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Lighting. click Calculate. and under Heating Information. and then re-open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog to begin calculations. ■ Select 2_Middle_Library. and click OK. For Building Service. Next. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is selected. Perform a heating and cooling loads analysis 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. You should correct the space error in the building model.

You are taken to the place in the report where the space information is displayed for review. 21 Click OK. Notice that the space information was automatically updated. select HVAC Zones.Zoning Load Fill is highlighted. click to the right of the building to place the legend. 72 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 3 In the drawing area. the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports. review the Calculated Loads and Design Loads.After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed. space.Space Plan. under the zone summary for 2_Middle_Library. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 2 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. For Color Scheme. click Training Files. and then click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 18 Close the report and activate Level 2 . In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_03_i. 19 In the drawing area. NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building. and zone information for the building model. under Energy Analysis. 15 Review the loads report for project. Assign a color scheme to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. indicating that it’s the active view. 17 In the loads report. click the blue hyperlink for 219 Library. and a loads report displays. weather. or zone information. or make any changes to the model. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog.rvt. space. A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than by using space schedules or accessing element properties. you performed a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building and viewed the loads report. 16 After you review the loads report. verify that Cooling Load by Zone is selected. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes. 4 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. you can rezone the model as necessary to optimize equipment usage in the building. Creating a Zone Color Scheme In this exercise. select 219 Library. you assign a color scheme to a zone in the building. Click OK.

You want a scheme that allows for a greater tonnage range.5 Zoom in to the legend. under Schemes. Select a different color scheme legend 6 In the drawing area. in 1-ton increments. select the color scheme legend. 7 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. and click OK. The new scheme displays in the view. Creating a Zone Color Scheme | 73 . Notice that the cooling load is based on tonnage value. select Tonnage Range. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog.

add a Cooling Load by Zone color scheme to the HVAC zones of the section view. Apply a color scheme to a section view 10 In the Project Browser. 11 Using the method learned previously. 9 Type ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. The colors are updated in the plan view to match the new scheme type. open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. 74 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .The new scheme allows for a greater range of cooling load values.

In this exercise.12 Close the file with or without saving it. Click OK. more category options are available. You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_04_i. you create a schedule that you use as a design tool for the supply air system. select New Construction. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 75 . enter Space Airflow Schedule.rvt. If you select Show categories from all disciplines. For Name. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document. Define the schedule 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. for Select available fields from. In the next exercise. select Spaces. Select Schedule building components. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify schedule properties 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ At the bottom left of the dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you create a schedule for the supply air system project.Space Fill is the active view. For Phase. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Report and Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. select Spaces. click Training Files. Creating an Airflow Schedule In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you applied a color scheme to the zones in your building. verify that Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 .

76 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Specify additional schedule properties ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. Define the airflow delta formula 5 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. ■ Click Calculated Value. For Formula. select Airflow Delta. Select Formula. Define conditional formatting for the airflow delta ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog: ■ For Test. In the Calculated Value dialog. In the Schedule Properties dialog. and then click Conditional Format. select Air Flow. and then click . ■ ■ Using the method learned previously.■ Under Available fields. ■ On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ For Fields. Click OK. the calculated value named Airflow Delta displays under Scheduled fields and will display as a column in the schedule. Header. In the Fields dialog. select Number. select Not Between. enter Airflow Delta. Select Ascending. enter . for Formula. and then select Hidden field. For Discipline. For Then by. click (Browse). select HVAC. You format the Airflow Delta field to display as red when the difference between calculated and actual airflow is outside an acceptable range. select Calculated Supply Airflow.(minus sign) after Calculated Supply Airflow. and click OK. add Actual Supply Airflow to the formula. For Fields. double-click: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Number Name Calculated Supply Airflow Actual Supply Airflow The selected fields are added to the Scheduled fields section. select Level. select Level. For Type. and Blank line.

right-click to access schedule properties. Because no air terminals have been placed in the model. This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. all the Actual Supply Airflow values are 0. and click OK. In later exercises. select red. you created an airflow schedule and defined properties such that when the airflow delta is in an unacceptable range. Double-click the column boundary to expand the column to the width of the text. verify that Show is highlighted. and all Airflow Delta fields are red for occupiable spaces. In the next lesson. the schedule gives a visual indication of the discrepancy. ■ The schedule displays.■ ■ ■ For Value. 6 On the Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Filter Unplaced or Unenclosed Items panel. notice that the software will test for delta values that are outside the range of -25 to 25 CFM. When you select a field and click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Highlight in Model. In the Color dialog. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 77 . and you can manipulate the display of columns as with any spreadsheet. Under Conditions to Use. you use the airflow schedule when adding system components to satisfy the required airflow. In this exercise. a view opens that contains the selected space. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the spaces. For Background Color. or right-click a column to hide or unhide it. Click OK twice. enter -25 CFM and 25 CFM. click the color swatch.

78 .

you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems. you use automatic layout tools and manual placement to create the primary and secondary supply air systems and ductwork to connect the components that you added. Placing Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding a water source heat pump (WSHP). In this lesson. After completing the air systems lesson. learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan. and work with the airflow schedule. 79 . After system creation. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Mechanical Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems.Designing Mechanical Air Systems 5 Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. Then. you will create supply air systems. you modify air terminal parameters. you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. As you place the air terminals. you size ductwork and validate your air system design.

Design ➤ Ceiling Plans ➤ Level 2 . and the tooltip and status bar display the space name.rvt.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 4 Click in the schedule view to make it active. and notice that the space is selected in the plan view as well. click Training Files. 5 Select space 223 in the schedule. 2 Double-click Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule. 3 In the ceiling view. and scroll to space 223. indicating that it’s the active view. Prepare the design views 1 In the Project Browser. and then click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 80 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_01_i.HVAC Ceiling is highlighted. In the left pane of the Open dialog. the space crossing lines display. When you highlight a space using the cursor. zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner.

Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 81 . 9 On the Placement panel. 11 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. Modify the supply diffuser flow 12 In the ceiling plan. NOTE Hosted air terminals are placed at the height of the host. 18 Repeat to add a third diffuser. the Airflow Delta is calculated accordingly. 8 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Element panel. and select Supply Diffuser . and then select both Copy and Multiple. 17 Move the cursor down.Hosted from the Type Selector drop-down. Also. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. the hosted elements are updated as well. enter 425 CFM. Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the diffuser without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. 15 On the Options Bar. as shown. 16 Select the upper left corner of the diffuser as the copy start point. 10 Click to place the supply diffuser in the upper left corner of the space. and press Enter. which in this case is the ceiling grid. The schedule updates with the new flow data.Add a supply air terminal 6 Click in Level 2 .Hosted : 24"x24" Face 8" Neck . select the diffuser. 13 On the Options Bar. for Flow. Notice that the lounge’s Actual Supply Airflow field in the schedule updates after the terminal is placed.HVAC Ceiling to make it the active view. and press Enter. Copy the supply diffuser 14 With the diffuser still selected. type 12. and then press Esc to end the command. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.Rectangular Face Round Neck . 19 Place 2 additional diffusers as shown. If the host element is modified or moved. verify that Constrain is cleared. click Place on Face.

As you place the return diffusers. If alerted that there is no tag loaded for the diffuser object. you load one from the library as follows: 23 In the alert dialog. 28 On the Placement tab.rfa. 82 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and then press Esc. 25 In the drawing area. clear Leader. 27 Select Return Diffuser . click Yes. 21 On the Options Bar. Place return diffusers 26 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. navigate to Training\Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\Diffuser Tag. select one of the diffusers. and click Open. 29 Place 2 diffusers. 24 In the Open dialog. Next.Tag diffusers 20 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category.Hosted : Workplane-based Return Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. select each of the 5 supply diffusers. 22 In the drawing area. as shown. Each diffuser has an airflow capacity of 425 CFM. you edit the return diffuser family in order to align the diffuser edges to the ceiling grid lines. click Place on Face. and the airflow delta value is within acceptable range. notice that the insertion point snaps the center of each diffuser to a grid intersection instead of centering the diffuser between grid lines.

select Strong Reference. and click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. under Other. 36 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. 35 In the Instance Properties dialog. 34 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Instance Properties. open Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Ref. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. as shown. and click OK. for Reference.Edit the diffuser family 30 In the drawing area. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 83 . 31 In the alert dialog. Level. 32 In the Project Browser. You change the symbolic lines to strong references so that they can be used to align to the lines of the ceiling grid. 33 Highlight one of the symbolic lines. and click to select the lines. select one of the return diffusers. click Yes.

37 In the Family Already Exists dialog, click Overwrite the existing version and its parameter values. Align the diffusers in the ceiling grid 38 In the ceiling plan, zoom in to the return diffuser at the bottom left of the Lounge. 39 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 40 In the drawing area, select the vertical grid line as shown.

41 Select the right edge of the diffuser. 42 Select the horizontal grid line as shown, and then select the top edge of the diffuser.

43 Using the same method, align the other return diffuser, as shown, and then press Esc twice.

44 While pressing Ctrl, select both return diffusers, and on the Options Bar, for Flow, enter 650 CFM310 CFM, and press Enter. Modify the airflow display arrows 45 Select the return diffuser at the lower left, right-click, and click Element Properties. 46 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Mechanical, clear LeftArrow, and click OK.

84 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

47 Using the same method, clear RightArrow and DownArrow for the other return diffuser.

48 Close the file with or without saving it.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals
In this exercise, you place air terminals in a room that does not have a dropped ceiling. As you place the air terminals, you modify air terminal parameters and work with the airflow schedule.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_02_i.rvt.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 85

Add non-hosted air terminals 1 In the Project Browser, expand HVAC - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design to make it the active view. 2 On the View Control Bar, for Scale, click 1/8" = 1'-0". 3 Zoom in to space Instruction 115, at the lower left corner of the building. When you highlight a space using the cursor, the space crossing lines display, and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. 5 Open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule, and then click View tab ➤ Windows ➤ Tile. 6 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 8 In the Type Selector, select Supply Diffuser - Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 - 8 Neck. 9 On the Options Bar, verify that Tag on Placement is selected. 10 In the drawing area, click to place the air terminal in the space as shown, and then click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.

The schedule was automatically updated with the actual supply airflow capacity of the diffuser. Also, the diffuser was tagged as it was placed. NOTE The software assigns sequential numbers to components in the order in which they are placed in a drawing. If you delete a component and subsequently place more of the same component in the same drawing, the number assigned to the deleted component will not be used. As a result, your components may be numbered differently than those in the training files. 11 Select the diffuser, and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 12 Modify the diffuser properties:

In the Instance Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Offset, enter 8'. Because non-hosted components are associated with a level, the offset value is the height of the diffuser from the level. Under Mechanical - Airflow, for Flow, enter 360 CFM. Click OK.

■ ■

86 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

13 With the diffuser still selected, click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 14 Select the bottom left corner of the diffuser, move the cursor down, type 20', and then press Enter. 15 Press Esc. By copying the diffuser, you are also specifying the same offset and flow for the new diffuser. Notice that the copied air terminal does not have a tag.

16 Using the same method, select both air terminals and copy them 14' to the right.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 87

Tag existing diffusers 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 18 On the Options Bar, clear Leader. 19 Select each of the untagged diffusers, and then press Esc. Create an embedded schedule You enhance the schedule by creating an embedded schedule to show data (system type, type, mark, and flow) for individual diffusers in each space. 20 Double-click the title bar of the Space Airflow Schedule to maximize it, and then right-click in the schedule, and click View Properties. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Other, for Embedded Schedule, click Edit. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

Select Embedded Schedule. For Category, select Air Terminals, and then click Embedded Schedule Properties.

23 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click System Type, Type, Mark, and Flow. 24 On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Mark. 25 Click OK 3 times. The schedule is updated and lists the data for individual air terminals in each space. Although the Airflow Delta value is within an acceptable range, it is a negative value. Next, you modify the airflow capacity of the diffuser in the lower left corner of the space to offset the increased heat gain of the southwesterly exposure.

88 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

Modify an airflow value in the schedule You use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow. 26 Using the method learned previously, tile the windows. 27 In the schedule, under space 115, select SD 1-12-110. 28 In the embedded portion of the Space Airflow Schedule, for Flow, enter 450 CFM, and press Enter. 29 Using the same method, change the flow for SD 1-12-111 and 112 to 330 CFM. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project, because you are modifying the digital database of building information. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM).

The Airflow Delta value for the space updates to a positive number.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 89

Place air handling equipment 30 Close the Space Airflow Schedule, and maximize Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design. 31 In the drawing area, select the zone (2-West-Area T) that includes space 115. As you highlight the zone, pay attention to the tooltip and the status bar to be sure you’re selecting the zone and not the space. The zone indicator has a line that spans all spaces in the zone, as shown.

32 Open the Instance Properties dialog, and under Energy Analysis, verify that the Calculated Heating Load value is 33807 Btu/h and the Calculated Cooling Load value is 3.9 ton (approximately 1.5 times the heating load). 33 Click OK. 34 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 35 In the Type Selector, select WSHP - Horizontal - High Efficiency - 2-5 Tons - Left Return - Right Discharge : 4 Tons. 36 In the drawing area, zoom and pan to the double door for space 115. 37 Press Spacebar twice to change the rotation of the pump so that the supply faces the space and the return faces away from the space. 38 Click to select an insertion point so that the supply is at the approximate center of the doorway. 39 Press Esc twice to end the command.

90 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

42 Press Esc to clear the selection. 44 Zoom in to space 115.40 Access the instance properties for the heat pump. ■ ■ For the end point. Verify that the measured distance is 9'. and verify the height of the WSHP: ■ ■ Click Modify tab ➤ Inquiry panel ➤ Measure drop-down ➤ Measure Between Two References. for Constraints ➤ Offset. click to select the midpoint of the bottom of the WSHP. 41 In the Instance Properties dialog. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 91 . enter 9' 0"2750. and click OK. click the Level 1 line. For the start point. Verify equipment mounting heights 43 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26.

When you highlight a space. you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses.Press Esc.rvt. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. However. IMPORTANT Unlike logical connections. 5 Verify that there are no Mechanical systems listed. You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment. A Revit MEP system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment. you create low pressure secondary supply air systems.HVAC Plan . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 92 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . After creating the logical connection.Design is highlighted. click Training Files. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. including energy analysis. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. right-click the title. indicating that it’s the active view. verify that Design ➤ HVAC . they are necessary to perform calculations (such as sizing) that reference the physical geometry. 4 If the System Browser title is Zones. In this exercise. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. the space crossing lines display. and click View ➤ Systems. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_03_i. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 at the upper left of the building. You then create the logical connection between the system components.

IMPORTANT In the System Browser. Notice that there are layout and system tools (Generate Layout. the assigned diffusers move to the respective system folder. and Flow value. Revit MEP assigned them to the Default Supply Air system. Create a secondary air system 7 In the drawing area. 8 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Supply. 13 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. the number of elements is updated. 9 Click Modify Duct Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. Connect Into. System Name. select the supply diffuser at the upper left of space 223. review the Number of Elements. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. and drag it to the bottom of the screen so that it displays horizontally below the floor plan. expand Mechanical ➤ Supply Air ➤ Mechanical Supply Air 1. Because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. 11 In the drawing area. All of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 93 . and Create Systems) available on the Modify Air Terminals tab. As you add diffusers to systems. 15 Click Cancel. 6 Keep the System Browser open. 12 In the System Browser. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy. and then select the last supply diffuser in space 223. On the Options Bar. These tools vary depending on the equipment used to create a system. Note that the Flow value (1700 CFM) is equal to the sum of the flow values for the 4 diffusers you added to the system. select the 3 supply diffusers shown in red and circled. 16 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. Notice that a mechanical system now displays in the System Browser. 10 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. Only mechanical equipment components can be highlighted and selected when you are using the Add To System tool.

In this exercise. 22 Click OK.17 Using the method learned previously. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. 19 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Select Equipment. and then select the WSHP (located outside the space). The system name is updated from Mechanical Supply Air 1 to WSHP 2-45 in the System Browser. you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. you create ductwork to physically connect system components. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. 94 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . for System Name. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. highlight the value and click Ctrl+V to paste over the selection. access system properties to see that the flow value (2125 CFM) has updated to include the flow value of the final supply diffuser. 26 Click Finish Editing System. 20 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Equipment Properties. which updates the name in the System Browser. You used the Create Supply Systems tool to logically connect air terminals to the WSHP. 18 Click OK. Rename the system Next. you rename the system to match the identifying data (Mark) of the equipment properties. In this exercise. the air terminals are the children. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. 23 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. under Identity Data. NOTE The organization of the Mechanical folder in the System Browser has changed so that the WSHP is the parent. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. highlight the value (WSHP 2-45) and click Ctrl+C to copy it. for Mark. and the system connects them. under Mechanical. 25 Click OK. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog.

the space crossing lines display. the software recognizes the system components and sketches a temporary layout path connecting them.rvt. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . A Generate Layout tab displays.HVAC Plan. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 5 On the Options Bar. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_04_i. Lines indicate the proposed duct layout (blue signifies a main duct line and green signifies a branch). Also. which provides various layout tools.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 95 . select Network. each with branches off the main duct at 90-degree angles. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. click Training Files. In this case. When you highlight a space using the cursor. click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser to display it. indicating that it’s the active view. and display solution 1. Add ductwork using the Generate Layout tool 1 In the Project Browser. 4 In the drawing area.Design is highlighted. 6 Use the Next Solution and Previous Solution arrows to scroll through the available solutions. select the upper left diffuser. 3 If the System Browser isn’t displayed. the Network type provides several solutions. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Solution Type.

and use the drag control to drag it just to the left of the lighting fixtures. you’ll get an error in a later step. Click OK. enter 9' 10 1/2". enter 9' 10 1/2". For Duct Type. WARNING Be careful not to drag the main duct too close to the diffusers. select Flex Duct Round : Flex . For Flex Duct Type. click Modify. For Offset. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. 8 In the Duct Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Main. enter 3'. click Settings. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. For Offset. 9 On the Generate Layout panel. Select Branch. as shown. If there is not enough room for the software to create the necessary fittings.Round. For Duct Type. 10 Select a vertical segment of the main duct.7 On the Options Bar. For Maximum Flex Duct Length. 96 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .

Either relocate the system components. The sketch lines are converted to ductwork. The most common cause of these errors is that the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added. select a different layout solution.11 Click Finish Layout. or manually modify the duct. or offset elevations are incorrect. a transition connecting the elbow is automatically added. Remember to always check duct connectivity after modification. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 97 . NOTE Errors may occur while attempting to create duct geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. as is the elbow itself. For example.

Flow. Usually. but not all values are used in this view. This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. Modify the legend display 16 Select the color scheme legend. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Duct Legend. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then pressing Tab. 98 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . highlight a segment of the main duct. for Values Displayed. Notice that the legend includes all possible values for the color scheme. You can delete ductwork and the system remains. select Duct Color Fill . press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. and click to select it. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts. thus it is not part of the system. The first time you press Tab. and equipment. a disconnection exists. The ductwork is a physical (not a logical) connection. NOTE When multiple ducts and fittings are connected. and click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. fittings. the branch to which the duct is connected highlights. 15 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog.NOTE Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. 17 In the Type Properties dialog. Using a flow-based color scheme. for Color Scheme. under Graphics. and then click OK. select By View. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection. you can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. If the entire network does not highlight. you can verify connectivity as you create a system. Add a color scheme legend 12 In the drawing area. and click OK. 14 Click to the right of the system to place the legend.

25 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. select Duct Color Fill . 24 Click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. Notice that the color fill for the connected ductwork has updated. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 99 . for Schemes. and click OK. The outflow for the WSHP is calculated as the sum of the airflows for all downstream air terminals.Velocity. Modify flow values 18 In the drawing area. 26 Click OK. 22 Close the Instance Properties dialog. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog.The legend now shows only the color scheme values used in this view. decrease the flow value by 100 CFM. 21 Access the instance properties for the WSHP. for Flow. and press Enter. and notice that the flow value has updated with the change.Airflow. note the Air Flow value (2125 CFM). Edit color scheme 23 In the drawing area. and on the Options Bar. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and then press Esc to clear the selection. 20 In the drawing area. select the color scheme legend. Use the velocity-based color scheme as a visual reference to confirm that air is flowing through the system ductwork at the appropriate velocity. select the WSHP. under Mechanical . select one of the diffusers in the system.

select Calculated Size Only. click Cancel. If you get an error that there is not enough room to place the required fittings. Click OK. 100 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . press Tab 3 times to highlight the entire system (including the WSHP). Select Restrict Height. and then click to select it. 29 In the Duct Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. highlight a segment of the duct. The ductwork and fittings are updated. Under Constraints.Calculate duct sizes 27 In the drawing area. you need to modify the layout: ■ ■ ■ In the warning dialog. and select 16". 28 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. select Friction. and enter . The flow information graphically represents the properties of duct systems so that you can easily identify problems with the system. and drag it to the right. Select Only.08 in-wg/100ft. Repeat the steps necessary to select the entire system and then size it. Select the upper segment of main duct. for Branch Sizing.

Notice that the ribbon now displays a System Inspector tab.Inspect the system The System Inspector is a tool that lets you place the cursor over each system to inspect it for airflow. and pressure loss) to find deficiencies in the system. you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. 30 Select one of the ducts in the supply air system. static pressure. 33 Move the cursor over the system components. 32 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. so that you can modify the system design accordingly. Use the information that displays (flow. 31 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. pressure. The selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected for you to use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork. Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection). Using this tool. and pressure loss. and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection). Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 101 .

36 Close the file with or without saving it. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_05_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You also convert rigid duct into specified lengths of flex duct. remember that all information is color-coded according to pressure. 34 Zoom in to various parts of the system and verify that the flow arrows are correct. 35 Click Finish. 102 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Manually Creating Ductwork In this exercise. you modify existing ductwork and then use the Connect Into tool to connect components to the existing air system. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.NOTE As you inspect a system. also known as the critical path.rvt. click Training Files.

and select the WSHP. 4 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Element panel.Design is highlighted.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . and select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Beveled Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and click to specify the end of the main duct. Manually Creating Ductwork | 103 . 5 Press Spacebar to make the new duct match the WSHP duct size and location. 2 Zoom in to space Instruction 115 in the lower left corner. and click Draw Duct. 6 Click midway between the 2 top light fixtures to specify the end of the first segment of the main duct. 7 Move the cursor to just below the lowest set of diffusers.Manually create main duct line 1 In the Project Browser. indicating that it’s the active view.HVAC Plan . 3 Right-click the supply air connector (the connector facing the room’s double doors).

15 On the ViewCube. for Offset. select 9' 10 1/2". right-click the connector grip. 14 In the Project Browser. Connect the remaining diffusers using the Connect Into tool The Connect Into tool is used to add or connect components to an existing air system. 12 End the branch by clicking at the intersection of the branch duct and the main duct. 10 Select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows/Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. and Left sides converge in order to orient the view as shown. select the top right diffuser. 11 On the Options Bar.3D MEP.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Level 1 . double-click MEP . Create branch duct lines 9 To begin branch duct. 13 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. NOTE When drawing duct.8 Press Esc twice to end the command. The software accounts for the difference in height from the diffuser connector to the specified offset height. and click Draw Duct. Front. use the connector grip to quickly and accurately locate a connector. Click this corner Resulting view orientation 104 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . click the corner where the Top.

16 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. connect the remaining diffusers to the main duct. 20 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 18 Make the floor plan the active view. Manually Creating Ductwork | 105 . 19 In the drawing area. it is considered a closed loop. select the top unconnected supply diffuser. 17 Tile the windows so that you can view results in 3D as you add duct in 2D. in space 115. The ductwork is automatically created. and is sized appropriately for the neck size of the diffuser. Because this branch has 2 end points (the diffuser and the connector into the main duct). the color fill indicates the flow value. 22 Using the same method. Also. 21 Click the main supply duct to select it as the duct to connect into.

24 Select the remaining diffusers. Branch ductwork in 3D Add an endcap 26 In the plan view. zoom in to the open end of the main duct. A portion of the rigid ductwork is converted to Flex Duct.Branch ductwork in 2D Convert duct to flex duct 23 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Convert to Flex Duct. 106 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and select the top left diffuser. 25 Press Esc. Revit MEP displays a warning that the flex duct that was created exceeds the Maximum Flex Duct setting in the Mechanical Settings dialog. You can ignore the warning.

you need to add an endcap to create a closed loop.To ensure that the system has proper flow propagation and accurate system calculations. Manually Creating Ductwork | 107 . 32 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Split. 33 Click on the main duct below the top set of diffusers as shown. 30 Press Esc twice. 27 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Duct Fitting. Size ductwork 34 Highlight a section of the main duct (which is now split). Endcap in 3D Split and size main duct 31 Maximize the plan view. and click to select it. 29 Click the endpoint snap of the main duct. press Tab to highlight the entire main duct run. 28 Select Rectangular Endcap : Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. and then click Modify.

under Constraints. clear Restrict Height. 108 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . This height constraint is used when you place duct in a restricted space.Airflow. 37 Press Esc to clear the selection. The ductwork is sized to provide appropriate CFM value for the system. such as a plenum. 40 Using the same method. verify that the value is the total of the diffusers supplied by that segment of duct. under Mechanical . Verify duct sizing 38 In the drawing area. verify the flow rate for the remaining segments of the main duct.35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. and click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. select a segment of the main duct. for Flow. and then click OK. and click OK. 36 In the Duct Sizing dialog. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog.

Create return and supply piping systems. and a cooling tower located on the roof. Add valves to allow the overall piping system to work in 2 modes: cooling and heating. using modulating valves to divert through the cooling tower during cooling mode. You begin the piping system design by placing water source heat pumps and a boiler on level 3 of the building model. In this lesson. Use a color-coded display to verify and adjust pipe sizing. or to bypass the cooling tower during heating mode. Then. including 2 base mounted pumps. additional water source heat pumps from level 1. you create the systems and piping to logically and physically connect the system components. you create a hydronic piping system that is designed to run in a cooling mode and a heating mode. Use the System Browser to review the piping systems. Automatically and manually lay out piping. you learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment. This system is modeled to accommodate full system flow through a boiler.Designing a Mechanical Piping System 6 In this lesson. 109 . Inspect and validate the piping systems and physical connections.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you place mechanical equipment. including 2 water source heat pumps (WSHP) and a condensing boiler.Level 3 mechanical piping system Adding Mechanical Equipment In this exercise. on level 3 of the building model. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_01_i. 110 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .rvt. click Training Files.

and select WSHP . indicating that it’s the active view.Design is highlighted. as shown.High Efficiency . 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned.HVAC Plan . verify that Wall faces is selected. in corridor 328.Left Return . A tooltip and the status bar (located at the lower left of the window) confirm the space name and number. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 4 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. you can identify a space by placing the cursor over the space component. NOTE Although space tags are not included in this view. 2 Zoom in to the right side of the shorter building wing. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment.Adding air side equipment 1 In the Project Browser.2-6 Tons . 5 Press Spacebar to rotate the component. 7 On the Options Bar.Right Discharge : 6 Ton from the Type Selector drop-down. and click to place it in the shorter wing of the building. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 111 .Horizontal .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .

as shown. verify that the WSHP is still selected. 13 Place another WSHP to the left of the one you just placed. (Use the alignment sketch graphics to position the second WSHP the same distance from the corridor wall as the first. click the dimension.8 Click the corridor wall face. and click to place the dimension. 10 Select the WSHP. and enter 2'. click the top edge of the WSHP. 9 Click Place Dimensions tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and in the Type Selector. as shown. 12 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment.) 112 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 11 Press Enter and then press Esc.

for Water Flow. for Offset. enter 12 GPM. 17 Press Esc to clear the selection. Under Mechanical. 20 Press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the component. above and to the left of the Base Mounted Pump. Click OK. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 113 . Add water side equipment 18 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. Modify WSHP parameters 15 While pressing Ctrl. 19 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. select the 2 WSHPs. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and select Condensing Boiler : 500 MBH from the Type Selector drop-down.14 Click Modify. enter 9'. and click to place it in the mechanical room. as shown.

including flow and pressure. you create the return and supply piping systems. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. The recommended workflow to create piping systems is to: ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment and other system components. Create pipes to physically connect the system components. Creating a Piping System In this exercise.21 Click Modify. 114 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 22 Close the file with or without saving it. and use the System Browser to review and confirm the systems. Create the logical connection between the system components. A system is the logical connection between system components such as water source heat pumps (WSHPs) and a boiler.

Creating a Piping System | 115 . Unlike logical connections (systems).Mech 330). This display option allows you to simplify the browser view by showing only the Piping discipline. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 Expand the Unassigned folder. but without a corresponding system. click Training Files. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_02_i. analyses cannot be performed. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . where it is easier to review the information. indicating that it’s the active view. 5 In the System Browser.HVAC Plan . Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation.rvt. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and drag the window down so it displays along the bottom of the screen. right-click the Systems column heading. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . You can create pipes to connect system components. 4 Click the titlebar for the System Browser window.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . Chilled water supply system: 2 WSHPs and a cooling tower Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Design is highlighted. and expand the Default Hydronic Supply 1 and the Default Hydronic Return 1 systems to view the mechanical equipment placed in the building.IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. and click View ➤ Piping.

A red dashed line connects the 2 WSHPs in the drawing. After you placed the WSHPs and boiler. Assigning a system component to an existing system. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. Notice that on the Options Bar.In the System Browser. select one of the WSHPs that you added to the system to activate this tool and the other options on the Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. This display indicates that the system is selected. Create the hydronic return piping system 7 In the drawing area. enter CHWR to represent Chilled Water Return. Therefore. You assign a system component to a system either by: ■ ■ Creating a logical connection (system) between the system components. 9 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. Equipment that remains in a default system is included in heating and cooling loads calculations. select the 2 WSHPs. 11 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. leaving a large number of components in a default system can hinder performance and prevent accurate calculations for the systems where they should have been assigned. 12 In the drawing area. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Return and Default Hydronic Supply systems category located in the Unassigned folder. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to a system. select the boiler. IMPORTANT All mechanical equipment in the project should be assigned to a system other than a default system. 10 On the Options Bar. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Return. the assigned equipment moves from the Unassigned folder to the respective assigned system folder. the System Equipment is Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. for System Name. 116 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . while pressing Ctrl. and the Edit System tool is not active. As you assign equipment to systems.

under Design ➤ HVAC . and select the cooling tower. 17 On the Options Bar. Notice that the Hydronic Return option does not display because the selected component already has a hydronic return system assigned to it. double-click Roof . (You can click the Piping Systems tab to access the Return System properties. 18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System.) 16 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System.13 Click Finish Editing System.HVAC Plan . Create the hydronic supply piping system 14 Select one of the WSHPs that you placed previously.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 20 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System.Design. 21 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. for System Name. enter CHWS to represent Chilled Water Supply. and select the second WSHP to add it to the supply system. You have created the hydronic return system. 19 In the Project Browser. Creating a Piping System | 117 . 15 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Supply.

23 Close the roof plan view. In cooling mode. 24 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. The hydronic supply system highlights in red. select Connector 1 : Undefined : Round : 4'' : Cooling Water Supply In. and bypasses the cooling tower. 25 Select the boiler. 26 Click Finish Editing System. and click Select. You can now view the systems hierarchy: CHWR and CHWS logically connect the boiler (parent) with the WSHPs (children). In heating mode. 118 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and click Expand All. 29 Right-click CHWS. indicating the logical connection. The boiler is the only equipment that has connectors with compatible system types (hydronic supply and hydronic return). and click OK. IMPORTANT The new system named CHWS is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply ➤ Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. the boiler supplies heated water to the system. Confirm and validate the systems 27 In the System Browser. expand the Hydronic Return system category.22 In the Select Connector dialog. right-click the Hydronic Supply system category. Notice that the Options Bar indicates 3 for the Number of Elements. The CHWS system contains the 2 WSHPs and the cooling tower. the water returns through the boiler into the cooling tower by way of the WSHPs. the cooling tower provides cooled water to the system. You select the boiler as equipment for supply to the WSHPs. 28 Using the same method.

enter 18 GPM. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout In this exercise. The CHWS Flow value is updated in the System Browser. 31 In the Column Settings dialog. select Fluid Type and Fluid Temperature. for Water Flow. and click OK. You can select the columns that you want to display in the System Browser. right-click the Flow value for one of the WSHPs in the CHWS system. and click Column Settings. you can view several parameters. under Mechanical. including the flow rate and size of the component. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 119 . 32 In the System Browser. and click Properties. You also manually modify the layout path as required. 33 In the Instance Properties dialog. 30 Right-click the Systems column heading. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. expand Piping.In the System Browser. you create the physical connections in the pipe system automatically using the Generate Layout tool. and click OK.

TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering. When you draw a box to select components.HVAC plan view range are highlighted. 2 Beginning outside the building at the upper left corner.HVAC Plan . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_03_i. and the 2 base mounted pumps are selected (and display in red). you can place the cursor over a system component. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. A system preview displays in red. Create the Level 3 return pipe layout 7 Select a WSHP.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. press Tab to highlight the system. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a selection box around the floor plan. indicating that it’s the active view. and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors).rvt. The level 3 water source heat pumps (WSHPs). select CHWR. click Check None. and click to select it. 10 Click OK. 5 In the Filter dialog.Design is highlighted. the boiler. 3 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . You use an alternate method of selecting the system in the next steps. and click OK. Select components with the Filter tool 1 In the Project Browser. IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Revit MEP provides several solutions from which to choose. select Mechanical Equipment. 9 In the Select a System dialog. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . You select a system in the dialog to view it in the drawing. 120 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . Notice that all components within the Level 3 . and then click OK to create a layout for the currently selected system. click Training Files. you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view.Mech 330). 4 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. The layout path solutions display with the main in blue and the branch in green. then the Select a System dialog displays.

you can change the pipe type and the vertical offset at which the piping will automatically be created. 13 Click Cancel. For Inset.11 On the Options Bar. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. select Perimeter. duct. 15 On the Options Bar: ■ For Solution Type. verify that Solutions is selected. IMPORTANT The branch offset lets you automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. 14 On the Generate Layout tab. verify that the Offset value for the Main and for the Branch is 10' 0''. This functionality is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. click Settings. or architectural components. ■ ■ Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 121 . 12 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. You can modify this value for the main and branch elevations. structural beams. Click (Next Solution) until solution 4 of 5 is selected. enter 1' 6''. It does not reference the architecture. The perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components.

Branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment. 17 Optionally. the flow for one WSHP is 18. you modified the flow value for the WSHPs. and the flow for the other is 12. The piping is automatically created along with the appropriate connectors and fittings so that all of the piping segments are connected to equipment. the Status Bar displays the components being highlighted: ■ ■ ■ Branch in a pipe network.16 Click Finish Layout. select the pipe connecting the WSHP on the right to the boiler. 18 Place the cursor over the piping. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. Branch in a pipe network including the branch objects. and press Tab 3 times. 19 In the drawing area. to display the path with thinner lines. View the Status Bar to verify the branch option currently displayed. 122 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . With each Tab. Verify the flow In a previous exercise.

The flow through this pipe should equal the flow of both WSHPs. Add the Level 1 WSHPs to the return system 25 Select the WSHP on the left. 23 Under Mechanical. and access its instance properties. 24 Press Esc. 20 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. under Mechanical. and click OK. notice that the Water Flow is 30 GPM. The flow from the 2 WSHPs travels into the boiler. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 123 . verify that the value for Flow is 30 GPM. and click OK. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 22 Select the boiler. This value indicates the total of the flow for the 2 WSHPs (18 GPM + 12 GPM).

26 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. which propagates flow throughout the system. 28 In the Project Browser.HVAC Plan . 31 Close the Level 1 plan view. Physically connect the multi-level WSHPs Previously. you logically added Level 1 WSHPs to the CHWR System. On the Options Bar.Design. double-click Level 1 . you physically close the CHWR loop. 27 On the System Tools panel. 124 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 30 Draw a selection window to select the 6 WSHPs. 32 Click Finish Editing System. the Number of Elements is now 8.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 29 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. Logically. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . the Level 1 WSHPs are connected to the chilled water return system (CHWR). click Edit System. 33 Zoom in to the piping that comes from the floor below. and verify that CHWR is selected from the System Selector drop-down. and zoom to fit the drawing in the view. Next.

under Mechanical. the 6 WSHPs from Level 1 have already been added to the chilled water supply system (CHWS). so the total flow of 125 GPM indicates that the flow has propagated correctly. 35 Using the drag control. and the flow coming from Level 1 is 95 GPM. extend the pipe to the left until it connects to the center line of the existing pipe at the horizontal and nearest snap. 37 In the Instance Properties dialog. review the properties for the boiler to verify that the Water Flow value is 125 GPM. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 125 . access its instance properties. select a WSHP. NOTE For the purposes of this tutorial. and click Cancel. note that the value for Flow is 95 GPM. The fittings are automatically created to connect to the return piping coming from below. Manually modify piping in layout mode 39 In the drawing area. as shown. and then close the Instance Properties dialog. 38 Using the same method. and then click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. Verify the flow from the lower level 36 With the new pipe selected.34 Select the bottom piece of horizontal pipe. The Level 3 WSHPs generate a flow of 30 GPM.

select CHWS. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. 45 Click the supply pipe from the cooling tower above. Click Settings. For Slope. 126 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 41 Click OK. For Inset. enter 1' 6''. The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component. enter 9' 6'' for both the Main Offset and the Branch Offset. 44 Click the boiler to remove it from the layout path solution. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Solution Type. and then click OK. select Perimeter 1 of 5. enter 0''/12''.40 In the Select a System dialog. ■ ■ 43 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Remove.

(Both sections are at the same elevation. 46 Click Modify.) 49 Select the 4-way arrow control. select the right vertical green sketch line in the path. and drag it to the left (just to the right of the double door in the underlay). as shown. 47 In the drawing area. select the vertical sketch line just above the one you already selected. you connect the boiler to parallel-connected base mounted pumps. In a later exercise.The boiler and cooling tower are no longer included in the layout path. as shown. 48 While pressing Ctrl. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 127 .

128 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel to the system. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. or offset elevations are incorrect. or manually modify the pipe. Add piping to close the supply loop. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ Connect the boiler to the return piping. and drag it to the right to align it with the sketch lines you just moved. NOTE Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing.50 Using the same method. select the short vertical path line connecting the right WSHP (in the same location as the short segment of pipe). Connect the cooling tower into the supply system to maintain the closed loop. To create the piping system. You tile a plan view and a 3D view to simultaneously create the pipe (physical) connections and validate the pipe geometry. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. select a different layout solution. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout In this exercise. 51 Click Finish Layout. Either relocate the system components. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. you manually lay out piping to create a closed loop system.

NOTE Default color filters for the Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return have already been specified for this project in the Visibility Graphic Overrides dialog.rvt. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and the return pipes are magenta. click Training Files. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. indicating that it’s the active view.Design is highlighted.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .HVAC Plan . as shown. You may find it helpful to view the system in both plan and 3D during design and validation. Sometimes (such as during vertical alignment) it’s easier to select components in 3D.Design ➤ 3D Views. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_04_i. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 129 . 4 Adjust the view in both windows (use the ViewCube and Zoom tools) to see the connections on the boiler. 2 Under Design ➤ HVAC . you will notice that the supply pipes are dark purple. double-click 3D HVAC Building. As you work in the training file. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

draw a selection window around the elbow fitting and the small piece of pipe connecting into the boiler return connector. 130 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . as shown. 6 Press Delete. 7 In the plan view.Modify return piping to accommodate supply piping 5 In the 3D view. select the section of piping.

and press Esc to clear the selection. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 131 . ■ Click to move the piping. 9 In the 3D view. Click to specify the reference point. 10 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. select the boiler.8 Move the piping: ■ ■ Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. ■ Move the cursor up 4''.

13 In the plan view. 132 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Using the Connect Into tool ensures that if the connection is successful. 11 In the Select Connector dialog. and the lower one is secondary. The top base mounted pump in the plan view is primary. The connections are automatically created. and the boiler is connected to the return piping.You use this tool on components with connectors to automatically create piping between the component and the existing system. The tool also automatically creates the appropriate fittings. and click OK. select the return pipe riser. and click Draw Pipe. 14 Right-click the grip that represents the supply connector (top). click Connector 2 : Hydronic Return : Round : 2'' : Cold Water In. An automatic flow valve will be used to direct the flow from the boiler to the 2 pumps. select the boiler. Plan view of return piping connection to the boiler Connect the primary base mounted pump to the boiler Two base mounted pumps are included in the system. flow will propagate through the connecting pipe and be assigned to the appropriate system based on the connector to which it is connected. 12 In the 3D view.

7''. Add another 2' section of pipe to the right. and select Pipe Types: Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. You can input dimensions as you draw pipe to ensure specific length segments. enter 2'. the Select Connector dialog displays prompting you to select the return or the supply connector. and press Enter. if a component has 2 connectors that are not connected to piping. and click just before the midway point on the primary base mounted pump. enter 1' . and you select 1 connector. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. ■ Move the cursor down. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 133 .In a plan view. 17 Draw the piping: ■ Move the cursor to the right. 16 Press Spacebar to acquire offset and pipe diameter values from the connector. 15 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. for Offset.

134 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . as shown. and the appropriate fittings are created. 20 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. select the primary base mounted pump. it may be helpful to switch Automatically Connect off to avoid unintended piping connections. select Connector 2 : Undefined: Round: 3''. 22 Select the last segment of pipe you drew. 18 Press Esc twice. The pipe is automatically connected to the base mounted pump.NOTE The Automatically Connect option attempts to connect piping that is positioned within a specified range. Notice in the 3D view that the specified offset dropped the horizontal run down. 19 In the plan view. 21 In the Select Connector dialog. As you place piping runs that are close together. and select it. and click OK. Upgrade a fitting 23 Zoom in to the elbow fitting.

and click to draw the pipe. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 135 . 26 Move the cursor down until the Status Bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection of the base mounted pump. and click the minus symbol.24 Click the bottom plus symbol to upgrade the fitting from an elbow to a tee. NOTE To downgrade from a tee fitting to an elbow. Connect the secondary base mounted pump 25 Select the tee fitting. and when the connector point displays. right-click the bottom connector. 28 Press Esc. and click Draw Pipe. click to connect to the pump. 29 If necessary. 27 Move the cursor to the right. you select the tee fitting. zoom out in the 3D view to see the new connections.

136 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . select the primary base mounted pump. 32 Move the cursor down until it joins the connector point on the secondary base mounted pump. and click Draw Pipe. for Offset.Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel 30 In the plan view. right-click the discharge connector. and click to create the pipe. enter 4'. 31 On the Options Bar. 33 Press Esc.

upgrade the fitting to a tee connector. these pipe connections were created automatically.Notice that you do not have to draw the 2 vertical pipes to connect to the pumps. zoom in to the elbow fitting on the left (secondary) base mounted pump. 35 Using the method learned previously. 3D view of parallel-connected base mounted pumps Add pipe to create a closed loop system 34 In the 3D view. as shown. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 137 .

for Offset. select the tee connector in the secondary base mounted pump. ■ Move the cursor down. 138 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and press Enter. enter 9' 6''.36 Draw pipe to connect the base mounted pipes to the return: ■ In the plan view. right-click the bottom control on the tee. and click Draw Pipe. Move the cursor down until the status bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection and vertical with the pipe shown. type 1'. and click to create the pipe. ■ ■ On the Options Bar.

and click Element Properties. you validate the flow through the system. You now have a closed loop system. Next. select the pipe from the secondary base mounted pump to the supply pipe. Validate flow propagation through the supply system 38 In the plan view. right-click. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 139 .37 Click Modify.

When you create the pumps in parallel. The flow is being propagated through the piping. select the cooling tower. 46 Press Esc. which is rounded up to 63 GPM (1/2 of 125 GPM). Flow is not currently passing through the cooling tower because it is not yet connected to the hydronic piping system. 40 Click Cancel. The cooling tower propagates flow through the inlet and outlet connectors. you can specify the Flow Factors for the 2 pumps as any combination that adds up to 100%. Connect the cooling tower Next. and click Element Properties. 44 In the 3D view.39 In the Instance Properties dialog. 47 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Extend drop-down ➤ Trim/Extend Multiple Elements.50 or 50% of the Flow. under Mechanical. 43 Press Esc. notice that under Mechanical. for Cooling Water Flow. 45 In the Instance Properties dialog. 42 Click OK. The Flow Factor for the primary pump is set to 50% also. and click OK. notice that the Flow Factor is a parameter that is . notice that Flow is 125 GPM. 140 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 48 In the plan view. ■ Upper pipe going to the cooling tower (inlet). 41 Using the same method. In the Instance Properties dialog. under Mechanical. you physically connect the cooling tower piping to propagate flow. view the properties for the secondary pump. select the following pipes: ■ Supply pipe. as shown. the value is 0 GPM. right-click.

49 Press Esc.■ Lower pipe (outlet). NOTE Piping colors update based on specified filters. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 141 . Both pipes for the cooling tower are automatically connected to the piping system.

select the cooling tower. When the valve is open. You also add shut-off valves to control the flow to and from the cooling tower. and close the dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. and is heated by the boiler. and open the Instance Properties dialog to validate that the flow is propagating correctly through the cooling tower. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_05_i. 142 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 51 Verify that the value for Cooling Water Flow is 125 GPM. click Training Files. You add a bypass valve to stop the flow and direct it to the cooling tower (cooling mode). Adding Valves In this exercise.rvt.50 In the 3D View. the water bypasses the cooling tower. you add valves to model the piping for 2 modes: cooling mode and heating mode.

7 Click the center of the pipe to place the valve. and select Ball Valve . 3 Click the section of pipe between the supply in and supply out pipes to the cooling tower. indicating that it’s the active view. and click the top Rotate control to rotate the valve to a horizontal position.HVAC Plan .2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. 4 On the Options Bar. 5 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory.Place a bypass valve to control flow to the cooling tower 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .Design is highlighted. 8 Press Esc twice. as shown. Adding Valves | 143 . verify that the Diameter value is 3''. NOTE Be careful to select a bypass valve in this step. Rotate the valve 9 Select the valve. The bypass valve is closed by default. 6 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Element panel.

2-6 Inch : 4'' from the Type Selector drop-down. 12 Select Ball Valve . 144 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 14 Using the same method. Place shut-off valves 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 15 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.2-6 Inch Bypass : 4'' valve on the return pipe for the cooling tower. 13 Click to place the valve at the midpoint of the supply pipe to the cooling tower. place another Ball Valve .10 Press Esc. parallel to the previously placed valve.

For the bottom horizontal pipe (flow from the cooling tower). 18 In the Instance Properties dialog. (This valve allows the water to flow through it. under Mechanical. validate that the Flow value is 0 GPM. Adding Valves | 145 . In heating mode. you want to shut off the flow of water into the cooling tower. verify that Flow is 0 GPM. and click OK.) 21 Select the 2 regular valves (in open position). Add valves to facilitate a dual mode system 17 Select the small piece of pipe above the bypass valve. and click Element Properties.2-6 Inch : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. and select Ball Valve . For the top horizontal pipe (flow to the cooling tower). validate the following flow values: ■ ■ ■ For the pipe below the bypass valve. Modify valves to bypass the cooling tower Currently the system is designed to run in cooling mode. 19 Using the same method. 20 Select the bypass valve.Rotate both valves 16 Click the top Rotate control to the left of each valve to rotate the valve as shown. validate that the Flow is 125 GPM. You bypass the cooling tower with hot water coming from the boiler. and select Ball Valve .2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. You add valves to the cooling tower to enable the system to alternately run in heating mode. validate that the Flow is 125 GPM. right-click.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_06_i.22 Using the method you just learned. Sizing Pipe In this exercise. 3 Click to place the color scheme legend in the area to the right of the piping system. The color-coded display allows you to quickly see differing sizes and flow of piping.Design is highlighted. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. Initially. indicating that it’s the active view. The flow coming out of the cooling tower is 0 GPM. validate the following: ■ ■ ■ The flow going into the cooling tower is 0 GPM. You then use a combination of friction and velocity to size the pipes appropriately.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . you verify automatically calculated pipe size and flow parameters. as shown. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Pipe Legend. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . click Training Files. 146 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . The flow traveling through the bypass section of pipe is 125 GPM. Display the pipe color scheme legend 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. you use the pipe color scheme legend as a color-coded reference to view the flow within the pipes and the sizing.HVAC Plan .

This display will help you size the pipe using friction and velocity sizing methods.4 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. 8 Press Esc to clear the selection. select Pipe Color Fill . and click OK. 5 Compare the legend to the color coding in the drawing to verify that the flow values are as expected.Size. 7 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. for Schemes. click Pipe Color Fill . Display the color fill based on pipe size 6 Select the Color Scheme Legend. Sizing Pipe | 147 .Flow. This option displays the pipes in colors based on flow values. and click Modify Pipe Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. and click OK.

148 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . press Tab 3 times (so that the status bar indicates that you’ve highlighted a branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment). It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run. Under Constraints. Click OK. select Friction. 13 Press Esc. and click to select the branch. Select And. and enter 2. 10 Move the cursor over the pipe between the primary and secondary base mounted pumps. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. select Larger of Connector and Calculated. enter 5 FPS. for Branch Sizing. The piping increases in diameter based on the friction and velocity values specified. and for Velocity. 12 In the Pipe Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method.Size the pipe using friction and velocity methods 9 Zoom in to the section of pipe connecting the boiler to the parallel base mounted pumps. IMPORTANT The Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used.25 FT/100ft.

rvt. Either relocate the system components. Inspecting the System In this exercise. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. Using the System Inspector. The System Inspector lets you inspect each piping system for flow.Design ➤ 3D Views. and double-click 3D HVAC Building. 14 Close the file with or without saving it. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. or offset elevations are incorrect. Inspecting the System | 149 . pressure. you use the System Inspector to inspect the Level 3 hydronic piping system.IMPORTANT Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. or manually modify the pipe. and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system. 2 Select the section of the return piping (magenta) between the 2 water source heat pumps on the upper level. Inspect the system 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. select a different layout solution. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you can easily detect problem areas in your design and resolve them immediately. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_07_i.

The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection).3 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. and pressure information including pressure loss. flow. An inspection flag reports the section number. The critical flow (indicated by red arrows) is in the main line going to the boiler. NOTE Zoom in to the piping to see the arrows clearly. This information helps you modify the system design. as required. 4 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe. Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system. the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected. 5 Place the cursor over the same section of return piping. 150 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to quickly check these connections for all systems throughout your project. select 90° F. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design. In this exercise. as shown. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open. Checking Piping Systems Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. and the Pressure Loss is 1. 7 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Properties. for Fluid Temperature. the Static Pressure is 7. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. inspect Section 6 again. and to size pipe. Note that the Flow is 80 GPM. targeting those systems that need attention.88 psi.67 psi. Checking Piping Systems | 151 . 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. 10 Click Finish. 9 Using the same method.65 psi and the Pressure Loss is 1.Modify fluid temperature 6 Place the cursor over the section of pipe (Section 6) between the 2 WSHPs on the lower level. and click OK.89 psi. you need to validate them. and notice that the Static Pressure is 7.

Design ➤ Floor Plans. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Pipe Systems. and click Show to view all of the system components. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Design ➤ Floor Plans. 5 Verify that Systems and Piping are selected. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. click Training Files.HVAC Plan . A dialog lets you click Show multiple times for different views. Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations.rvt. 6 In the Project Browser. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project. and for pipe sizing. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems. Revit MEP moves them from the Unassigned folder to their assigned systems folder. notice the CHWS (Chilled Water Supply System) is listed. Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system. This occurs when the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors). double-click Level 1 . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i. 8 Expand Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. and double-click Level 3 . As you learned when placing components. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system). Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. 152 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 9 Right-click CHWS. 4 In the System Browser. under which the mechanical equipment that was assigned to the system is listed. you assigned a water source heat pump to a supply hydronic system. the pipe is associated with that system. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. You will check the mechanical piping components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm specified and default system assignments.Design. After you have assigned all components to systems. right-click the Systems titlebar. The dashed red lines represent the logical connection.HVAC Plan . IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is: default system is not empty. Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design. the water source heat pump is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Sanitary system in the Unassigned folder. thus assigning the components to a system. but the same component has a sanitary system connector that you have not assigned to a system. Warnings display. If you place components without assigning them to a system. In the System Browser. Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser. all system components must be assigned to a system after they are placed. expand the Hydronic Supply folder and notice that the Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH is listed. and click View. For example. 7 In the System Browser. After you assign components to a system. the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display not empty warnings. Notice that these warnings indicate that the Default systems are not empty.

13 Right-click CHWR. You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems. and select Level 3 . 10 Using the same methods. click Close.TIP If you have multiple views open. and confirm unassigned system components. right-click Hydronic Return. 15 Close the file with or without saving it. expand the Unassigned folder. and click Expand All. you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views.HVAC Plan .Design floor plan. confirm the system and the system assignments for the Hydronic Supply system. 11 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Switch Windows drop-down. Checking Piping Systems | 153 . 12 In the System Browser. and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components. 14 Using the methods that you learned. The return system that you created (CHWR) is listed along with the boiler and the water source heat pumps (WSHPs) that you assigned to this system. otherwise.

154 .

155 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design an electrical system.Creating an Electrical System In this tutorial.

156 .

you complete the planning tasks associated with creating an electrical system. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Specify electrical settings. Color fill plan with required lighting levels ■ Create a space lighting analysis schedule 157 .Planning an Electrical System 7 In this lesson. Define required lighting. Assign space color fills according to required lighting levels.

select 75. distribution systems. select Copper. For Temperature. enter THHN.rvt. ■ ■ For Factor.04. For Temperature Rating. expand Wiring . Select Correction Factor. 2 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_01_i. select Wiring Types. As you place components and create circuits. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. select 90. Add a wiring type 3 In the left pane. click (Open). Click OK.Wire Sizes. wiring. In this exercise you review electrical settings. Revit MEP checks to ensure that components are compatible with the specified voltages and distribution systems. 158 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . Add a correction factor 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. and demand factors that are applied in the design. speeding up the design phase. For Material. ■ Click New Correction Factor. You also add a wiring type. ■ ■ For Material.Specifying Electrical Settings Electrical settings determine the voltages. 4 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. click Training Files. select Copper. enter 1.

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Insulation, select THHN. For Max Size, enter 2000. For Neutral Multiplier, enter 1.0. Select Neutral Required. For Neutral Size, select Hot Conductor Size. For Conduit Type, select Steel.

Add a voltage definition 5 In the left pane, select Voltage Definitions. The Voltage Definitions table is used to specify a range of voltages that are used with your voltage definitions. By specifying a range, you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value. 6 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 240. For Value, enter 240. For Minimum, enter 220. For Maximum, enter 250.

Add a distribution system 7 In the left pane, select Distribution Systems. Note the 3 distribution systems listed. 8 Click Add and in the Electrical settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 120/240. For Phase, select Single. For Wires, select 3. For L-L Voltage, select 240. For L-G Voltage, select 120.

Specify demand factors 9 In the left pane, select Demand Factors. You can specify demand factors that let you adjust the rating of the main service for the building. 10 In the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Load Classification, select Power. Under More Than, select 10000 VA. Click Split. Select 20000 VA and for Demand Factor, enter 50. Click OK.

11 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a schedule to define required lighting levels. Then you assign lighting levels to spaces.

Specifying Electrical Settings | 159

Defining Required Lighting
In this exercise, you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building, such as offices, restrooms, and conference rooms. You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level), then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of spaces in your project. Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles. In this case the key style is the type of space and, because the key is linked to your new project parameter, its value becomes the Required Lighting Level. Later in the tutorial, you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_02_i.rvt.

Add a project parameter for lighting 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog, click Add. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Required Lighting Level. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type of Parameter, select Illuminance. For Group Parameter Under, select Electrical - Lighting. Under Categories, select Spaces. Verify that Instance is selected. Click OK twice. The Required Lighting Level project parameter has been added and will appear as an instance parameter for all spaces, under the Electrical - Lighting group in the space element properties.

Verify the new parameter 4 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 5 In the drawing area, zoom in on the lower left corner and use the crosshair as a guide to select Space 218.

6 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

160 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

7 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Electrical - Lighting, note the Required Lighting Level parameter. Click OK. Create a schedule for required lighting levels 8 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 9 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Requirements. Select Schedule Keys, and for Key Name, enter Lighting Levels. Click OK.

10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click Required Lighting Level, and click OK. The schedule displays and includes a title and column headings. 11 Double-click the column boundary to the right of each column to adjust the column to fit the text.

Add space lighting requirements to the schedule table 12 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New. 13 In the Key Name column of the first row, enter Open Office. 14 In the first row of the Required Lighting Level column, enter 45. 15 Adjust the column boundaries as needed.

16 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New to add 13 more rows. 17 Complete the table by entering the following:

The fc value is automatically applied as the parameter is based upon illuminance parameter type, which is mapped to project units. Notice that as you enter the data, the rows are automatically sorted by Key Name. You can change the sort/grouping to sort by Required Lighting Level.

Defining Required Lighting | 161

Change the sort order of the schedule 18 Right-click in the schedule and click View Properties. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

For Sort By, select Required Lighting Level. Select Blank Line.

21 Click OK twice. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Required Lighting Level.

22 Using the same method, change the sort order back to the default setting. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Key Name. Apply a lighting level to spaces 23 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 24 Zoom to Space 218 and select the space element.

25 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Note that under Electrical-Lighting, that Required Lighting Level is blank. 26 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Identity Data, for Lighting Levels, select Instruction-Standard. Notice that the Required Lighting Level now has a value of 50 fc and the field is dimmed, since the Lighting Level is set to use the value assigned to the Instruction-Standard key value. The

162 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

only way to change the value is to either select a different Lighting Level key, select None for Lighting Level and type a specific value, or edit the Required Lighting Level key schedule for the selected key. Since Required Lighting Level is an instance parameter, the value input applies only to the selected space. 27 Click OK. You can apply a key schedule to multiple spaces at the same time by selecting the spaces and specifying the lighting levels in the Electrical properties dialog.

28 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a color fill scheme for space lighting.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules
Revit MEP lets you add color fills to spaces based on specific space parameters. Space color fill plans and schedules can be helpful as design tools and as design communications documents. In this exercise, you will create a space color fill plan using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. Space color fills can be used with any parameter that exists for the space components. Later in this exercise, you create a space lighting analysis schedule to aid in the layout of your lighting design. The schedule includes a calculated lighting delta value, which is the difference between the required and the calculated illuminance values. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_03_i.rvt.

Create a color fill legend scheme 1 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Color Schemes. 2 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Schemes, for Category, select Spaces. Under Schemes, click (Duplicate).

3 In the New Color Scheme dialog, for Name, enter Required Lighting and click OK. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Scheme Definition, for Title, enter Required Lighting Levels. For Color, select Required Lighting Level, and click OK to dismiss the alert message.

5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:

Under Scheme Definition, verify the By Range is selected.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 163

Select the scheme for At Least 20.00 fc, and click (Add Value). This command adds a new value based on the split value of the unit you are adding the new value after. For example, if you select the value for 20 fc and click Add, then the new value will be 40 fc. If you select the value for 20 fc again and click Add, then the new value will be 30 fc or half of the difference between the two values you are adding.

With the scheme for At Least 20. 00 fc still selected, click

(Add Value) again.

Select the scheme for At Least 40.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

■ ■ ■

Select the scheme for 30.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

Select the scheme for 50.00 fc, enter 75.00, and press ENTER. Select the scheme for 40.00 fc, enter 50.00, and press ENTER.

Click OK.

Add a legend and apply the color scheme 6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting CF. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. 8 In the drawing area, click to place the legend to the right of the drawing. 9 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■ ■

For Space Type, select Spaces. For Color Scheme, select Required Lighting. Click OK.

The color fill plan displays the required illuminance levels based on the key values previously created.

164 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

Create a space lighting analysis schedule 10 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 11 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Analysis and click OK.

12 In the Schedule Properties dialog, for Available Fields, double-click Number, Name, Level, Average Estimated Illumination, and Required Lighting Level. 13 Click Calculated Value. 14 In the Calculated Value dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Lighting Delta. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type, select Illuminance. For Formula, click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Average Estimated Illumination. Click OK.

In the Calculated Value dialog, for Formula, at the end of Average Estimated Illumination, press the spacebar, type a hyphen, and click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Required Lighting Level. Click OK twice.

15 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Level. Select Header. Select Blank Line. On the Formatting tab, for Fields, select Lighting Delta. Click Conditional Format.

In the Conditional Formatting dialog, under Condition, for Test, select Not Between.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 165

select Red. for Custom Colors. ■ ■ In the Color dialog. 16 Close the file with or without saving it.■ ■ For Value. 166 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . enter -5 fc and 5 fc. Click OK three times. Click Background Color. The lighting delta values that are not within the conditional value of -5 fc and 5 fc are highlighted in red.

Create circuits (with and without wire) to create the logical connections between devices and fixtures. 167 . These values are based on internal lighting level calculations which use the space floor and wall reflectance values and workplane height to automatically calculate average illuminance or lighting levels. Use the System Browser to check your design. using the color fill plan and the space analysis schedule as an aid in lighting placement to satisfy required lighting levels. you modify the color plan to illustrate the space by the Average Estimated Illumination values. you create electrical systems (including lighting circuits. Then. First. and switch systems) by establishing logical connections between electrical components. Create power loads. Balance wire sizes and breaker service. you verify illuminance values to indicate when the lighting level requirements have been satisfied. Create a panel schedule. you place lighting fixtures in the drawing. power circuits. as you place lighting fixtures. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills In this exercise. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add devices and fixtures using schedule to satisfy required lighting levels.Designing an Electrical System 8 In this lesson.

Lighting Color Fill view is open. select Average Estimated Illumination. You can create additional color schemes. select the color legend. click Training Files. select the color for Less Than 20. 168 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . In the Color dialog. select Orange. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ Under Schemes.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. then modify the color scheme legend to use the color fill plan as a design tool for many tasks. By using orange as the color for this range.00 fc. for Basic Colors. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_01_i. for the Spaces Category. Modify the color fill plan 1 Verify that the Level 2 . we can quickly identify those areas of the building that do not meet the specified lighting requirements.rvt. click (Open). 3 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. Click OK. Under Scheme Definition. 6 Press ESC to deselect the legend. ■ ■ ■ 5 Click OK. 2 In the drawing area. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Notice that the Library has an average estimated illumination less than 20.00 fc.

The color fill plan also indicates in orange an illumination value below 20 fc. indicating a value greater than 0 fc. the illumination values in the color fill plan and schedule analysis will automatically update.7 In the Project Browser. and the Lighting Delta as red for values out of the +/.277VM_Plain Recessed Lighting Fixture 600x600 . As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. 16 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x2’ (2 Lamp) . Add fixtures 14 In the drawing area.277. The color fill will change colors as lighting fixtures are placed that raise the illumination level above 20 fc. zoom to space Library 219. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. 17 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. The red field will clear once the +/.5 fc range is satisfied. 13 Click the Level 2 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 169 . 10 Click the Level 2 Color Fill_Lighting Plan view to make it active. Windows are arranged in a counter-clockwise order. however the color fill plan can display within the range below the specified value because of the +/. 15 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Lighting Fixture. Note that the lighting delta can be cleared.Lighting Ceiling Plan view to make it active. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. All of this works as a visual aid for the designer to insure design requirements are met. The order of the tiled windows is determined by the order in which the windows were activated.5 fc range specified in the conditional format of this field. The colors will coincide with the values in the color fill legend. 8 In the Project Browser. which is the lowest value in the specified range. with the last activated window appearing in the upper-left corner. all three of these colored fields will clear to white.5 fc range. The schedule indicates the Average Estimated Illumination as yellow for values of 0 fc (conditional format). 9 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans and open the Level 2 . 11 Click the Space Lighting Analysis view to make it active.Lighting Ceiling plan. expand Schedule/Quantities and open the Space Lighting Analysis view.

the lighting delta and average estimated illumination for space Library 219 are updated. 20 Select the lighting fixture. NOTE This option must be selected in order for lighting information to be updated in the color fill plan and schedule.The Place on Face option allows the fixtures to be hosted by the ceiling plan. verify that the option for Calculate Coefficient of Utilization is selected. select Multiple. 26 Use the Copy command to place 2 more fixtures as shown. the fixtures will move accordingly. so that as the ceiling plan moves vertically. 21 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 18 Click to place the fixture. 23 Click OK. 25 On the Options Bar. In the Space Lighting Analysis view. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 24 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog. 170 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

NOTE Object snaps are used for selecting intersections of the ceiling grid. 27 Press ESC to end the command. 30 On the Options Bar. select Multiple. select the 3 fixtures. 29 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 31 Click in the drawing area to place 6 additional groups of fixtures as shown. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 171 . 28 In the drawing area.

Modify multiple fixture instances 34 Select the vertical center group of light fixtures. Note the value in red for the space Library 219.32 Press ESC. 33 Click to activate the Schedule window. The values in the Space Lighting Analysis view are updated automatically. 172 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 173 . 36 In the Filter dialog. and for Category. Click OK. 37 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (2 Lamp) .35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.277V. click Check None. select Lighting Fixtures.

The values in the schedule are updated automatically. Note the changes for the space Library 219. 38 Click to activate the Color Fill_Lighting Plan view. 174 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

42 In the drawing area. Note the changes for the space Library 219. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 175 .277V. The lighting delta is satisfied. 41 On the Options Bar. click the ceiling grid line as shown. select Multiple Alignment. 40 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align.39 Repeat the previous steps to change the same group of fixtures to Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) .

176 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . The fixture aligns.43 Click the left edge of the first fixture. 44 Repeat the previous step to align the remaining fixtures.

you modify the IES data of the light fixtures with the goal of maximizing the lighting output using the fewest number of fixtures.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In the next exercise. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_02_i. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 177 . click Training Files.45 Press ESC to end the command. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. you modify the light fixture IES files. 46 Close the file with or without saving it. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures In this exercise. click (Open).

3 In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule view.Lighting Color Fill plan.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 .Create a new lighting fixture type 1 In the Project Browser. zoom to space Library 219 and select the lighting fixture shown. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . scroll to view space space Library 219. Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 . 178 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Note the Average Estimated Illumination value of 46 fc. 2 Tile the views as shown. Expand Schedules/Quantities and open Space Lighting Analysis. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Click Edit Type. 5 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.Lighting Plan. 4 In the Level 2 Lighting Plan view.

for Ballast Loss Factor. select Xenon and click OK. ■ Click Apply. For Luminaire Dirt Depreciation. for Type Mark. Under Electrical. enter F15. for Lamp. Under Photometrics. Under Identity Data.277V and click OK. for Color Preset. ■ ■ ■ In the Light Loss Factor dialog.ies and click Open. click the value for Initial Color. 7 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. and click OK. Note the lighting type has changed to F14. click the value for Photometric Web File and click Browse. In the Select File dialog. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 179 . select 463T5_S. Apply the lighting fixture type 8 Select all the fixtures in the center column in the Library as shown. for Name enter 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W .00 lm. Click OK. Under Photometrics.00 VA. ■ Under Photometrics. specify 15000.85.93. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Initial Intensity dialog. click the value for Initial Intensity. ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical Loads. select Luminous Flux.■ In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Duplicate. ■ In the Initial Color dialog. In the Name dialog. for Apparent Load. ■ Click OK twice. the Lighting Delta for the Library is updated. Under Photometrics. enter 162. click the value for Light Loss Factor. enter . select T5 [HO]. enter . Note that in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule.

180 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 11 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W . Remove lighting fixtures 13 Select the 3 lighting fixtures in the center column of the Library as shown. Note that the selected lighting fixtures have been updated. and for Category. 10 In the Filter dialog. click Check None. and that the lighting delta for the Library in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule also has been updated.277V. 12 Press ESC to deselect the fixtures. select Lighting Fixtures. Click OK.

Press Delete. 15 In space Library 219. Apply the fixture type to other fixtures 14 Click Modify tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Match Type. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 181 . Note the lighting delta updates again. 16 Click the other fixtures in the center to apply the fixture type. select the top center fixture.

182 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Remove lighting fixtures 18 Select the 2 lighting fixtures as shown.17 Click Match Fixtures tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. Note that the lighting delta for the Library has been updated again.

In the next exercise. and receptacles to your design. and Receptacles | 183 . click (Open).rvt. Place lighting switches 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open.Press Delete. 2 In the drawing area. click Training Files. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_03_i. The procedure for placing switches and receptacles is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP. Junction Boxes. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. junction boxes. you add switches. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The lighting delta has been updated and is now 0. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. Placing Switches. Placing Switches. Junction Boxes. and Receptacles In this exercise you add switches for the lighting switches and the receptacles in your project.

277V.3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 5 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Placement tab ➤ Place on Vertical Face. Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host.Regular Voltage: Passive Infrared . 6 Position the switch on the interior wall as shown. 7 Click to place the switch. 184 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 4 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Wall Occupancy Sensor . it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall.

Place junction boxes 10 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. browse to Revit MEP ➤ Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ Power Devices. The element type Junction Boxes .NoLoad: 4” Square is selected in the Type Selector. 12 In the Load Family dialog. Select Junction Boxes . and Receptacles | 185 . 9 Press ESC to end the command. 13 Position the junction box in space Computer Lab 222 as shown. Junction Boxes.rfa and click Open. Placing Switches. 11 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family.NoLoad.8 Place a second switch of the same type on the other side of the wall as shown.

enter JB-1NL. for Mark.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 Power Plan view. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. you can enter a space to separate the unit values. enter 9’0”. 16 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. note the Number of Poles is 1. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Power . Click OK twice. 186 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . note that Apparent Load is set to 0. zoom to space Library 219. 20 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden to close other views that may be open. Place wall-hosted receptacles 19 In the Project Browser. 15 Select the junction box. 21 In the drawing area. 18 Press ESC to deselect the junction box. Click Edit Type. for Level 2 .Offset.14 Press ESC to end the command. Under Electrical. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. NOTE When entering values. In the Type Properties dialog.

Distribution System. 23 In the System Browser. 24 For any column.22 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 25 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Check None. Select Load. 26 In the System Browser. NOTE If necessary. Space Name. This list displays connectors and circuits that have not been assigned to a panel. Space Number. dock the System Browser at the bottom of your window. Right-click the column heading again and click View ➤ Electrical. Note that the values for the space Library 219 are currently blank. Placing Switches. and Voltage. Expand General. Expand Electrical. and Number of Elements. Click OK. right-click the a column heading and click View ➤ Systems. expand Unassigned and scroll space Library 219. Select Size. Junction Boxes. right-click and click Column Settings. and Receptacles | 187 .

30 Scroll the System Browser to see the added receptacles. 33 Position the cursor on the Move Witness Line grip as shown.27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. Reposition the receptacle 32 Select the receptacle on the right. 35 Select the dimension and enter 12’. 28 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 34 Drag the grip to move the witness line to the receptacle on the left as shown. 31 Close the System Browser. 29 Click to place 2 receptacles in space Library 219 as shown. 188 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

Placing Switches. Junction Boxes. and Receptacles | 189 . 36 Press ESC to deselect the receptacle. select Copy and Multiple. Place additional receptacles 37 Repeat the previous steps to place a third receptacle in space Library 219 as shown.The receptacle on the right is repositioned according to the dimension you enter. 40 On the Options Bar. 38 Select the receptacle. 39 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.

and enter 12’ and press ENTER. move the cursor along the wall. 190 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 42 Move the cursor down. enter 12’ and press ENTER to place another receptacle.41 Click the midpoint of the receptacle.

Junction Boxes. Placing Switches. and Receptacles | 191 .43 Press ESC to end the command.

46 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. 47 Click to place 3 floor receptacles as shown. 192 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .Place floor-hosted receptacles 44 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 45 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard.

you need to create logical connections to define the topology. Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans. The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 193 . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan.48 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create lighting circuits and show wire.

and work toward the higher voltage. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_04_i.equipment. then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created. main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP). click (Open).rvt. You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2). 2 In the drawing area. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Electrical Equipment. click Training Files. Adding wiring to a project is optional. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 194 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . In this exercise you also become more familiar with the wiring settings. zoom to the space Electrical 220. Add panelboards 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open.

11 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical . 14 Select the panelboard. 13 Repeat the previous steps to place a 480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . Click OK. 15 On the Options Bar. for Max.Surface: 100A. select 480/277 Wye. 8 Select the panelboard.Surface: 100A panelboard as shown. 10 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for Distribution System. 7 Press ESC to end the command. 9 On the Options Bar. enter PP-2B. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 195 . enter 20. 5 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Placement Panel ➤ Place on Vertical Face.4 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select 208V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 6 Click to place the panelboard as shown. #1 Pole Breakers.Loads. 12 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. select 120/208 Wye. for Distribution System. For Panel Name.

for Max. Click OK. For Panel Name. 24 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. 20 In the drawing area. Add a circuit with wire 19 In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 Lighting Plan view. which is the logical connection between the elements. click Check None. enter 20. ■ 18 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard.Loads. 21 Select all fixtures and switches in the space. zoom to space Instruction 221. #1 Pole Breakers. select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. Note that Apparent Load Phases are dimmed because they are calculated values. 23 In the Filter dialog. 22 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 196 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . The blue sketch graphics show the created circuit. and for Category. Click OK. enter LP-2B.

Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 197 . 27 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 26 Select lighting panel LP-2B.25 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. The red sketch graphics show the logical circuit with the home run pointing toward the selected panel.

32 Press ESC. 33 Select the switch on the right. 31 Click to place the switch in the drawing area as shown.28 Press ESC to end the command. 198 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Add a switch 29 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 30 Click Lighting Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Lighting Switches: Three Way.

34 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel and select Lighting Switches: Three Way from the Type Selector drop-down. 35 Select the left three-way switch. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. 36 Click the top-left lighting fixture to add to the circuit. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 199 .

Next you create circuits without showing wire. 40 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. enter 2. 43 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . Click OK. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire This exercise is similar to the previous exercise in that you create circuits. except without wire. 44 Close the file with or without saving it. select Wires. 39 Select all items in space Instruction 221. and for Category. click Check None. 41 In the Filter dialog. 38 Press ESC to end the command. Training File ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Click OK. 42 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. click (Open).Loads. Note that the tick marks are updated to show 4.37 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. for Hot Conductors. 200 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

4 Right-click the connector and click Create Power Circuit. Rating.rvt. 9 Select panel LP-2B in space Electrical 220. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 12 Move the System Browser pane to the bottom of the screen for easier viewing. 17 Scroll down and expand LP-2B. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 201 . 13 In the System Browser. 6 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. Distribution System. and Voltage Drop are selected. ■ 16 In the System Browser. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_05_i. 5 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. expand Power. Voltage. right-click on the Systems heading. and verify that Load. Expand Electrical. click Training Files. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. and then expand circuit 1. 15 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ Expand General and review the settings. Check circuits 11 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right and the lighting sensor. and click View ➤ Systems and Electrical.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. 8 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Select Panel. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. Add a circuit without wire 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. Click OK. 14 Right-click on the Systems heading and click Column Settings. 2 In the drawing area.

202 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to a panel. 18 Expand circuit 2 and note the devices. Add additional devices to the circuit 19 In the drawing area. View circuit information 24 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 20 Select the junction box and click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 28 Select one of the occupancy sensors. 26 Select the 4 remaining lighting fixtures and the other occupancy sensor in space Computer Lab 222. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. under Electrical. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. 22 With the junction box still selected. 25 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. 23 Move the cursor over one of the adjacent fixtures and click to select it. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 27 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. change the Voltage to 277V. 30 Close the System Browser. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. 29 Move the cursor over one of the fixtures and press TAB 3 times to view the circuit.Note the circuit in space Instruction 221. Note the addition of the junction box to circuit 2 in the System Browser. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. Click OK.

36 Select the upper-left fixture. note the label parameters and click Cancel. 41 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. Notice that all 6 lighting fixture tags are updated. click below the first one to place it. for Type Mark. Edit tags 42 Select a tag and click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. 44 In the Edit Label dialog. Click Tags. 45 Click Modify Label tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 203 . enter FR4. 47 In the drawing area. 40 Click OK twice. 35 Press ESC to end the command. Click Yes. 46 Click Place Label tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal ➤ Center and Vertical ➤ Top. 33 In the Tags dialog: ■ ■ For Lighting Fixtures. 34 Click each of the 6 lighting fixtures in space Computer Lab 222. 37 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 43 Select the label name and click Modify Label tab ➤ Label panel ➤ Edit Label.Add tags to fixtures 31 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. Click OK. click Edit Type. under Identity Data. select Lighting Fixture Tag: Standard. 32 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Deselect Leader. 38 In the Instance Properties dialog.

for File Name. select Lighting Fixture Tags. 52 In the Save As dialog. Click OK. Click Apply and note the label parameters are divided into 2 lines in the drawing area. Click OK. 57 Click Modify Lighting Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ and select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Wrap between parameters only. 204 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . select Circuit Number and Switch ID and click Add parameter(s) to label . Note the tags are updated in the drawing area. 50 Drag the handle on the right side of the tag to resize it by dragging it to the left. 56 In the Filter dialog. click Check None. select Break. Add tags to remaining fixtures 54 Select all the elements in space Computer Lab 222. Click Save. Next you create a switch system. and click Apply. 61 Close the file with or without saving it. enter a comma. For Circuit Number. 51 Click ➤ Save As ➤ Family. Deselect Break and for Suffix.48 In the Edit Label dialog: ■ Under Category Parameters.rfa. enter Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. 60 Zoom out to see the tagged fixtures. select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard and click Apply. Click OK. 58 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. and for Category. 49 Click Place Label tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. Note the tag is updated in the drawing area. 55 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 53 Click Create tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. 59 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. Creating a Switch System In this exercise you learn how to create a switch system.

14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right of the space. 6 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. 13 Click Modify Lighting Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 4 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. Create a switch system 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. for Switch ID. Note that the lighting fixture tags for the two fixtures are updated with the Switch ID. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 11 Highlight the fixture and press TAB 4 times to see the switch system.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 9 Select the occupancy sensor. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_06_i. 12 Select the occupancy sensor. 5 Click Modify Switch System tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. click (Open).rvt. 2 In the drawing area. enter a. under Electrical Lighting. 10 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. click Training Files. 8 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. Click OK. Creating a Switch System | 205 .

Click OK. Note the lighting fixture tags for the 4 fixtures below the wall are updated with the switch ID. 25 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. 20 Select the remaining 3 lighting fixtures. 16 Select one of the lighting fixtures below the wall. 22 Select the occupancy sensor on the bottom side of the wall.Lighting. under Electrical . 206 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 23 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Switch Properties. for switch ID. 18 Click Modify Switch Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. 21 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog.15 Press ESC to deselect the occupancy sensor. enter b. 17 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 19 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System.

6 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. click Check None. and data systems. 2 In the drawing area. select Electrical Fixtures. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Click OK. 7 In space Electrical 220. click Training Files. Next you create a circuit and size wire. 3 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Creating Power Loads In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). zoom to space Instruction 221 and draw a pick box to select all the components in the space. Creating Power Loads | 207 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. and for Category.rvt. The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system. click (Open). lighting. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_07_i. Add a circuit 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. 5 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power.26 Close the file with or without saving it. select the PP-2B panel. 4 In the Filter dialog. Circuits are used for power.

8 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 13 Select the wire again. and in the drawing area. select Long Wire Tick Mark. 208 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 19 Click OK. 18 For Neutral Wire Tick Mark.Loads. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog. click the minus symbol to delete a tick mark. select Wiring.rfa. select Hook Wire Tick Mark. and click Open. 12 Press ESC to deselect the wire. Notice the 3 tick marks is changed to 4 tickmarks. for Hot Conductors. enter 2. and in the right pane. 14 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. Click OK. 15 In the Load Family dialog. 10 Right-click the wire for the home run to the panel. select Hook Wire Tick Mark. for Ground Wire Tick Mark. under Electrical . and click Element Properties. 17 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. navigate to Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks. 9 Press ESC to deselect the wires. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings.

as shown. press Tab to display a preview of the circuit wiring. and click to select the circuit. 23 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. Creating Power Loads | 209 . 21 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel.The tick mark for all ground conductors are changed to a hooked tick marks and neutral conductors display as a long tick mark. 22 In space Electrical 220. Combine multiple homeruns into a multi-circuit homerun 20 Highlight one of the receptacles in space Computer Lab 222. select the PP-2B panel. 25 Select the homerun from space Computer Lab 222 and the wire between the first and second receptacle in space Instruction 221. 24 Press ESC to deselect the wires.

28 In the drawing area. add another wire between the connector on the last receptacle in 221. as shown. 29 In space Instruction 221. 27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Wire drop-down ➤ Arc. click the connector of the first receptacle. Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the homerun and the wiring for space Instruction 221 and a double arrowhead to indicate the multi-circuit homeruns. click a point halfway between the first and second receptacle to create an arc. There are only 3 tick marks 210 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .26 Press Delete. in space Instruction 221. and then click the connector of the second receptacle as shown. and the connector on the nearest receptacle in space Computer Lab 222.

click Training Files.rvt. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_08_i. and connect its wiring to a receptacle in space Instruction 221. Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service | 211 . zoom to space Electrical 220. then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase. Next you balance the loads for your design. An additional hot conductor is added to the 221 wiring. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source.on the wiring that extends to the space Computer Lab 222. click Open. 2 In the drawing area. Notice the triple arrowhead for the homerun. 30 Add wiring to space Electrical 220. select panel LP-2B. Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels. Finally. you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits. Balance circuit loads 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. 31 Close the file with or without saving it. This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded. 3 In the Electrical space.

Scroll down. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit: ■ ■ Scroll down and note the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12. Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating. The loads are now more evenly distributed over the three phases (Phase A . 14 Close the warning dialog. 212 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 11 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Remove from Circuit. Phase B 3636 VA. Under Electrical-Loads. Notice that the loads on Phase A. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Circuit Properties. enter 30A. 1-#12. 6 Click OK.3616 VA). 10 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 1-#10. Click OK.3712 VA. 13 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. click Rebalance Loads. 5 In the Edit Circuits dialog. 1-#12. and Phase C provides 2028 VA.4 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Circuits. while Phase B provides 2004 VA. B. 1-#10. 12 Select panel PP-2B. and note the value for the Wire Size parameter is now 3-#10. and Phase C . Verify and adjust wire sizes 7 With panel LP-2B still selected. A warning indicates that the power system is empty and will be deleted. and C shows an imbalance with the heaviest load 6932 VA on Phase A. for Rating. ■ ■ Adjust circuit breaker sizes 9 Select panel PP-2B.

17 Close the warning dialog. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. Create the panel schedule report 1 Verify that the Level 1 Power Plan is open.Loads. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit.rvt. 25 Press ESC to deselect the panel.15 Select panel PP-2B. 24 Select the transformer TP-2B. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_09_i. 18 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. Select PP-2B. for Rating. enter 30A. enter 25A. Creating a Panel Schedule | 213 . 23 With panel PP-2B still selected. 3 In the Select Panels dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Clear Selection. 21 With panel PP-2B still selected. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. Click OK. 20 Click OK to close the warning dialog. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. The Panel Schedule Report appears in a new window. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. click (Open). for Rating. Creating a Panel Schedule In this exercise.Loads. and click OK. A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating. Panel PP-2B is now reconnected to transformer TP-2B. The circuit breaker size for panel PP-2B is now sized to handle the connected load. Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. under Electrical . you create a panel schedule report for panelboard MDP-1. Next you create a panel schedule. and click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. under Electrical . 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports and Schedules panel ➤ Panel Schedule.

Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 214 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .rvt. the panel will not appear in the Select Panels dialog. 10 In the Panel Report Appearance dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Header Text. and open E601 . select Berlin Sans FB. for Font Size. for Font Size. expand Sheets (all). drag PP-2B onto the sheet. enter 3/32. Under Body Text. 4 Close the report. click Training Files.NOTE If a panel schedule has already been created for a panel. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Under Header Text. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. 8 Click Modify Schedule Graphics tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. 11 Click OK twice. This dialog allows you to control how the panel schedule report displays when it is included on a sheet. for Font. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. 6 In the Project Browser. Under Header Text. Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises. You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Other. enter 1/8. select Bold and Italic. 7 Select the schedule. Next you use the System Browser to check your design. click Edit. The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays. for Appearance. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_10_i. 5 In the Project Browser. click (Open). under Reports ➤ Panel Schedule.Panel Schedules.

11 Select the receptacle on the right side wall. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. notice that PP-2C for circuit 2 is updated. In the System Browser. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel PP-2C. Check circuits 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Circuits. 4 In the System Browser: ■ Right-click a column heading. press TAB once. Notice that the receptacle on the right side wall is not connected to circuit 2. 12 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. and then click the receptacle to select the circuit. 6 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall and press TAB once. 7 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the right side wall and press TAB once. ■ ■ 5 In the drawing area. each with a load of 180VA.View unassigned components 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. note that the receptacle is not connected to any circuit. Checking Your Design | 215 . 8 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add to Circuit. 9 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. Note the receptacle in space Lounge 212. In the System Browser. Expand Unassigned. There are 4 devices connected to circuit 2. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and click AutoFit All Columns to resize the columns in the System Browser. 3 Move the System Browser to the bottom of the drawing area. Expand Power ➤ PP-2C ➤ circuit 2. select space Lounge 212.

16 Close the details dialog. expand the warning category for Circuit is not assigned to a panel ➤ Warning 2. click (Expand warning dialog) to view details of the warning. 15 In the dialog. under Warnings. select MDP-1. 20 On the Options Bar. 22 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. zoom to space Electrical 214. Notice that panel LP-2C is not connected. for Panel. 21 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit.14 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector. Panel LP-2C is now connected to the main distribution panel MDP-1. 18 Select panel LP-2C. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. 17 In the drawing area. 216 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 19 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Systems Tools panel ➤ Select Panel.

Creating a Plumbing System In this tutorial. 217 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a plumbing system.

218 .

3 In the Type Properties dialog.Planning a Plumbing System 9 Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project. click Duplicate. 2 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you create a PVC pipe type. in addition to loading existing families.Design is open.rvt. and click Properties.Vent. you prepare to design the plumbing system by: ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a PVC Sanitary Pipe type.Sanitary. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . Specifying default sanitary piping settings for the main and branch piping. In this exercise. You load the families of components that are required for your plumbing systems. In this lesson. and specify the default fittings that will be used with this type. Adding a pipe size. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. 219 . right-click PVC . Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan. planning is critical to a successful design. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and click OK. 4 In the Name dialog.Plumbing Plan . type PVC .Design ➤ Floor Plans. Loading pipe fittings required by the plumbing system. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing\RME_Plumb_Planning_01_i. and verify that Level 1 .

PVC . NOTE For additional information on the Mechanical Settings.PVC . select Sanitary. under Mechanical. 19 Specify the same settings for the Branch sanitary piping as you used for the Main. 10 On the Selection panel. 22 Click New Size. 27 For the new pipe size.Sch 40 . Cross. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. select Tee Reducing Double Vent . verify that Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing are selected. Tap. DWV represents Domestic Waste Vent. enter -4' . 23 In the Add Pipe Size dialog. select None. select Tee Vent . and click OK. The new pipe type is listed in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Pipe Fittings.PVC . and click Main. 6 Click OK. select Branch. click Modify. under Pipe Types. 18 For System Type. 12 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. 17 In the left pane. for: ■ ■ ■ ■ Preferred Junction Type. 25 For Outside. select Sanitary.DWV: Standard. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion.5 In the Type Properties dialog. 9 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog.DWV. for Material. enter 10°. 220 | Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . enter 5/8''. click Pipe Settings. 13 In the right panel. Load piping component families 7 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 8 Click Place Pipe Fitting tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. for Pipe Connector Tolerance. Tee.Sch 40 .Vent is listed.0''. 24 For Inside Diameter. Add a pipe size 20 In the left pane. select Plastic. click Training Files. 21 In the right pane. and open Imperial\Families\Trap P . enter 1/2''. select Pipe Types: PVC Sanitary. In the Project Browser.Sch 40 . enter 27/32''. 15 For System Type. For Offset. 14 Expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion.rfa. 16 Specify settings for the Main sanitary piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. select Tee. for Nominal. Specify sanitary piping settings 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ .DWV: Standard. refer to Revit MEP Online Help. PVC . select Pipe Settings ➤ Sizes. 26 Click OK.

add a hot water heater. including plumbing fixtures. sanitary piping. and hot and cold water piping. you design the plumbing system for the Level 1 men’s room in a commercial building. 221 . Create the sanitary plumbing system. Create piping to connect sinks to the sanitary system. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place sanitary plumbing fixtures. vent. and add piping to physically connect the fixtures to the system. Add a sanitary and vent stack to the system. Create the hot water system. and create piping to physically connect the sinks to the hot water system.Designing a Plumbing System 10 In this lesson. Create the cold water system.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures In this exercise. NOTE To identify a space name and number. 222 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and a floor drain to the level 1 men’s room. 2 Zoom in to the bottom middle area of the floor plan. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . as shown. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. Place wall-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you add 2 toilets. click Training Files.Plumbing Plan . 1 urinal.Design is open.rvt. and verify that Level 1 . and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_01_i.Design ➤ Floor Plans. including the men’s room (space Male 107). move the cursor over a space and refer to the tooltip or the Status Bar for information. You place 3 sinks in a later exercise.

Reference lines are included in the plan view to make it easier to place components. 5 On the Placement panel.Wall Mounted. and 3 sinks. 4 On the Element panel. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. centered on the bottom horizontal reference line.The men's room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls. in the Type Selector. against the left wall. Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 223 . 1 wall-mounted urinal.1.6 gpf. 6 Click to place a toilet in the accessible toilet space. select Public .Flush Valve . under Water Closet . verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. as shown.

10 Click to place the urinal in the space above the 2 toilet spaces. (Again.) 8 Press Esc.Wall Hung. under Urinal . NOTE If it is difficult to align the urinal to the reference line. above the first in the standard toilet space. and press Esc.7 Click to place another toilet. zoom in closer. select 3/4'' Flush Valve. use the reference line to center the fixture. 224 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . Place a wall-mounted urinal 9 In the Type Selector.

Rectangular. under Floor Drain .2'' Drain. 12 On the Placement panel. you select the floor as the face because this is a floor mounted drain. 14 Click Modify. click Place on Face.Place a floor drain 11 In the Type Selector. Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 225 . 13 Click to place the drain above and to the right of the accessible toilet (at approximately 6'' and 6'' from the intersection of the reference lines for the 2 toilet areas). In placing the fixture. select 5''x5'' Strainer .

and review the components listed under this system. and a floor drain. The fixtures are included in the default system based on the connectors included with the components (sanitary connectors and cold water connectors). 16 Click the title bar for the browser. and notice that there are 2 default systems: Default Sanitary. a urinal. 226 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 18 Expand the Unassigned folder. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_02_i. right-click in the System Browser table heading. and click View ➤ Piping. and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. Creating a Sanitary System This is the first of 3 exercises that guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system. You then use Revit MEP’s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet. click Training Files. 17 If all disciplines are displayed. and Default Domestic Cold Water. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. and notice that the drain is not included because it does not have a cold water connector.rvt. The default systems contain the fixtures that you placed.Open the System Browser 15 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 19 Expand Default Sanitary. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets. 20 Expand the Default Domestic Cold Water folder. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. In this exercise.

6 In the plan view. 4 Zoom in to the plumbing fixtures in both views.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. draw a selection box around the fixtures in the men's room. starting in the lower left and moving to the upper right corner. Only plumbing fixtures are selected. and verify that Level 1 . verify that Plumbing Fixtures is selected. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 2 In the Project Browser.Design is open.Design ➤ Floor Plans. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 5 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.Plumbing Plan . and click OK. 7 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Creating a Sanitary System | 227 . open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 8 In the Filter dialog. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. clear Lines (<Overhead>).Create the sanitary plumbing system 1 In the Project Browser.

and notice that Sanitary 107 is listed. 12 On the Edit System panel.9 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Sanitary. expand Sanitary. 11 On the Options Bar. 10 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 228 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . If you deselected the drain. and the empty default sanitary folder is deleted. click Finish Editing System. All of the fixtures except for the drain also have cold water connectors. 13 In the Systems Browser. enter Sanitary 107. for System Name. the Create Cold Water System option would also be available. The components that were listed under the default system are now included in the Sanitary 107 system. You include the bathroom space number in the name. so the Create Sanitary System is available. The fixtures you selected all have sanitary connectors.

and click OK. A preview of the piping layout displays. a toilet. at the midpoint of the detail lines. 18 Click to select a point to the left of the accessible toilet. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Place Base. 16 In the Select a System dialog.Create physical connections 14 In the plan view. for example. 15 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. The base creates a vertical pipe for the system to connect into and establishes a source or an outlet for flow. as shown. Creating a Sanitary System | 229 . The base is placed. select one of the components in the system. select Sanitary 107.

27 Click Modify. 21 On Options Bar. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. click Solutions. select Intersections. and click Settings. The positive value slopes the pipe down toward the base point. click (Next Solution) until Solution Type 2 of 7 is selected. enter -1' 0''. and click OK. You override the default pipe settings before applying the recommended pipe layout. select Branch. it is helpful to be able to change the defaults as you work. for Solution Type. 22 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. When laying out a number of different systems with different offset requirements. 230 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . for Diameter. select Main. 23 For Offset. and modify it to meet project requirements. for Offset. 25 On the Options Bar. enter 1/8'' / 12''. The elevation is specified low enough to allow sloping of the sanitary piping in the system. for Slope. select 4''. You accept this suggested solution.19 On the Options Bar. enter -4'-0”. and for Offset. 26 On the Options Bar. The default settings are automatically modified. 24 In the left pane. enter -1' 0''. The elevation of the base with relation to the other components in the system is critical.

Customize the suggested layout 28 While pressing Ctrl. select the vertical route path segments. and move the cursor to the left to align all 4 segments to the base point. 29 Click the move parallel control (4-way arrow). Creating a Sanitary System | 231 .

30 In the 3D view. 31 Click Modify. as shown. and drag the line to the left to snap perpendicular to the main. as shown. 232 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 32 Select the vertical branch line for one of the toilets. use the ViewCube to orient the view.

34 On the Generate Layout panel. click Finish Layout. adjust the vertical branch line for the other toilet. Creating a Sanitary System | 233 .33 Using the previous method.

select the fitting and click to reorient it. ■ ■ ■ ■ 1=Branch in a network 2=Branch in a network including the branch objects 3=Branch in a network up to a piece of equipment 4=Network (including fixtures) 36 Click to select the fitting to the drain. and press Tab 4 times to check connectivity. 35 Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures. 234 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .Examine the piping Complete all steps in this section in the 3D Plumbing view. When a fitting is reversed. and examine the sanitary tee to verify proper orientation.

as shown. The slope control for every segment should indicate the slope is toward the sanitary outlet.37 Select the pipe segment to the right of the fitting. and manually creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise. and check the slope control. adding sinks in the men’s room. you continue with the work from the last exercise. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 235 . 38 Close the file with or without saving it.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 236 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .Design ➤ Floor Plans. 4 On the Element panel. 6 Click to place the sink centered on the top horizontal reference line. select 22''x22'' .Public. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_03_i. in the Type Selector. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 5 On the Placement panel. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. under Lavatory . 2 Zoom in to the men’s room (Space Male 107). Add sinks to the layout 1 In the Project Browser.Design is open.Rectangular. and verify that Level 1 .rvt. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Plumbing Plan . verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. as shown.

■ Move the cursor up above the top reference line. enter 2' 4''. For example. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 237 .7 Click Modify. TIP When entering dimensions. 9 Make 2 copies of the sink: ■ ■ ■ Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. select Multiple. you can enter a space to separate the value for feet and inches. and press Enter to create a second sink. Click the right endpoint of the placement reference line for the sink to establish a start point. On the Options Bar. in this step you can enter 2 4 (two space four) to specify 2' 4''. 8 Select the sink. without having to enter ' and '' symbols.

238 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . Add sinks to the sanitary system 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 16 On the Edit System panel. 11 In the System Browser. 12 In the drawing area. 13 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. and press Enter to create the third sink. click Finish Editing System. 15 Click the 3 sinks. Press Esc. click Add To System.■ ■ Enter 2' 4''. select a component of the Sanitary 107 system. expand Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 107. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. 14 On the Edit Piping System panel.

20 Select the fitting. Create piping to connect the sinks 17 In the Project Browser. notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) have been added to the Sanitary 107 system. under Design ➤ Plumbing . use the ViewCube to orient the view.Design ➤ 3D Views. 21 Select the tee. and click the + control on the left to upgrade the fitting to a tee. as shown. and zoom in to the elbow fitting for the urinal. 18 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 22 In the plan view. and click Draw Pipe.In the System Browser. right-click the top connector (sanitary connector). 19 In the 3D view. with the tee fitting selected. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 239 . double-click 3D Plumbing.

23 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch off this option. 25 Move the cursor up to the centerline of the middle sink. In this example. and click Apply. enter 2' . press Spacebar. piping connected to the sanitary system displays in olive green. the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting.6''. NOTE Piping is displayed according to color filters specified in the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. 27 Click Modify. 26 On the Options Bar. for Offset. for Slope. enter 1/8'' / 12''. 240 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . When you press the Spacebar. 24 On the Options Bar. and click to draw the pipe.

Sch 40 . and when the vertical center line displays. click to place the fitting. and click the lower rotate control to align the fitting parallel to the sinks.PVC . select Standard. move the cursor over the stub pipe. 32 Select the double wye fitting. 29 In the Type Selector. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 241 .3D view shown for clarity 28 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 31 Click Modify. 30 In the 3D view. under Wye 45 Deg Double .DWV.

36 In the section view.33 With the fitting selected. and click Draw Pipe. you add pipe segments to the double wye. 38 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch on this option. double-click the section head to open the section view. 37 Select the fitting. Add pipe stubs to the double wye 35 In the plan view. zoom in to the double wye fitting. In the next steps. 34 Press Esc. 242 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and press Enter. on the Options Bar. 39 Draw the pipe as shown: ■ Draw at a 45 degree angle up and to the right. for Offset. enter 6''. right-click the right connector. and press Enter. enter 1'.

draw similar piping for the left sink (the first segment angled at 135°). and click to place the pipe. ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the right until the end of the pipe segment intersects with the centerline of the right sink. which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered. 40 Click Modify. 42 Click Modify. 41 Using the same method. as shown. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 243 . 43 Select the center vertical pipe in the double wye fitting.Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool.

47 Move the cursor down. and click Draw Pipe. Add P-Trap Fittings 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile so you can see all 3 views. 49 Using the same method. right-click the bottom connector. 48 Click Modify. enter 6''. and press Esc. 46 In the section view. draw a 6'' pipe for the other 2 sinks. 244 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . draw a selection box around the left sink to select it.44 Drag the upper control until the pipe aligns with the centerline of the horizontal piping. and press Enter to create the segment of pipe. press Spacebar.

PVC . 55 In the 3D view. 53 Using the same method. place a P-Trap on the other 2 sinks. select the P-Trap on the left. select Standard. 52 In the plan view. under Trap P . Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 245 . click to place the P-Trap at the endpoint of the stub pipe for the top sink.Sch 40 .DWV. 56 Using the same method. and click the rotate control 3 times to orient the pipe toward the double wye piping.50 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. You adjust the orientation after placing all 3 P-Traps. 51 In the Type Selector. rotate the P-Trap for the other 2 sinks. You can see in the 3D view that it is connected. 54 Click Modify.

and press Enter. The piping is connected and the appropriate fittings are automatically created. Click in the plan view. select the left P-Trap. and click Draw Pipe. click to select the P-Trap for the middle sink. Move the cursor to the left. right-click the left connector on the P-Trap. Click Modify Pipe Fittings tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 58 Using the same method. Click Modify. 59 Connect the middle sink using a routing solution: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. In the plan view. Select the double wye pipe on the left. enter 6''.57 Finish the connection for the left sink: ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. connect the right sink to the double wye. 246 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System ..

■ ■ ■ ■ Specify a slope 60 In the 3D view. select the section of pipe you just drew. Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Routing Solutions. In the Type Selector. Routing Solutions tools are activated that let you add control points or remove control points. Press Esc. as shown.■ In the 3D view. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 247 . and select the vertical section of pipe from the wye. On the Routing Solutions panel. select the 3 horizontal pipes from the sinks. and select a proposed solution. click Finish to select the recommended solution. while pressing Ctrl. select PVC Sanitary. while pressing Ctrl. under Pipe Types.

61 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Slope. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you continue with the work on the sanitary system. 64 Select a pipe that you just modified. click Training Files. click Finish. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 62 On the Options Bar. and verify the slope. for Slope.rvt. 65 Close the file with or without saving it. Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise. verify that 1/8'' / 12'' is selected. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_04_i. 248 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . You have appropriately sloped the pipe. adjusting the sanitary stack. 63 On the Slope Editor panel.

DWV.PVC . 4 Click the top + control to upgrade the fitting to a tee. 10 In the 3D view. right-click the top connector. 5 Select the tee. select Standard. and open the following views: ■ ■ ■ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . click Modify.Floor level line. 9 In the Type Selector. 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 249 . 3 In the Section view. Add a reducing wye to the stack 8 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.Design.Plumbing Plan .Design. and click Draw Pipe. 7 On the Selection panel. and adjust the views as necessary to view the plumbing. 6 Move the cursor up to the 02 .Overall. and click the intersection to place the fitting. under Wye Combination with 8th Bend . as shown. select the vertical stack. Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 38.Sch 40 . 2 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. and click to draw the pipe.Add a vertical soil stack 1 In the Project Browser. select the elbow fitting on the right. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .

14 On the Options Bar. as shown. for Offset. Add a pipe plug to cap the cleanout 16 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 17 In the Type Selector. select Standard. click the midpoint at the end of the sanitary pipe.11 Click Modify. 15 Press Esc. 18 In the plan view. enter 1'-0”.DWV. under Plug .Sch 40 .PVC . 13 Click the rotate control once. 12 Select the fitting. 250 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and click the rotate control to change the orientation.

rvt.Plumbing Plan . 20 Close the file with or without saving it. Specify mechanical settings for the hot and cold water systems 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. Creating the Cold Water System In this exercise. Creating the Cold Water System | 251 .Design ➤ Floor Plans. and verify that Level 1 .Design is open.19 Click Modify. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. The plug is added to the end to cap off the cleanout. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_05_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog. A cleanout is required on all vertical stacks. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . you create the domestic cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system.

) 10 Click OK. 4 In the right pane. you specify different offset elevations for the cold water piping and the hot water piping. under Design ➤ Plumbing . and sinks. and for System Type. draw a selection box to select the toilets. and notice that Default Domestic Hot Water and Default Domestic Cold Water systems are listed. and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. enter 9' 3''. urinal. These categories include all of the components placed earlier that have relevant connectors. select Branch. select Domestic Cold Water. 14 In the System Browser. double-click 3D Plumbing . 7 In the left pane. For Offset. 15 In the plan view.) 16 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. expand Unassigned. for System Type. 5 Specify options for the Main hot water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. and click OK.2 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . select Pipe Types: Water. 6 In the left pane. select Pipe Types: Water. select Plumbing Fixtures. For Offset. 8 Specify options for the Main cold water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. 3 In the left pane of the Mechanical settings dialog. (Remember to specify Domestic Cold Water as the System Type. expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion.Overall. minimize the Sanitary system. for System Type. select Domestic Hot Water. if necessary. To minimize opportunities for piping interference. 252 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Hot Water system. select Main. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. verify that the value is 9' 0''. click Check None. (Do not select the floor drain because it does not have a hot or cold water connector. select Domestic Hot Water. 17 In the Filter dialog. and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Cold Water system.Design ➤ 3D Views. 9 In the left pane. select Branch. and click Main. Create the cold water system 11 In the Project Browser. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.

Creating the Cold Water System | 253 . click Edit System. 21 On the Edit System panel. 24 Click the horizontal water main above the toilets. verify that Predominantly Flush Valves is selected.18 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Cold Water. 20 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For System Name. enter DCW 107. select the toilet closest to the vertical soil stack. Notice that the water main displays in blue. Expand Domestic Cold Water ➤ DCW 107 to verify the components. indicating that it is now part of the cold water system. notice that the Default Domestic Cold water system is removed because all of the fixtures have been added to the DCW 107 system. click Finish Editing System. 23 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 19 On the System Tools panel. In the System Browser. For Flow Conversion Method. Create piping for the cold water system 22 In the 3D view.

28 In the Type Selector. select the sink above the urinal. For Slope. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 38 Move the cursor up to the top of the third sink. press Spacebar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe. 35 In the Type Selector. enter 10'. at the intersection of the water main pipe. enter 4'0”. and press Enter.25 Using the same method. 254 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and click Draw Pipe. for Offset. for Offset. 26 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe. 34 In the plan view. 27 On the Placement Tools panel. as shown. as shown. select Water. For Offset. 33 Click Modify. and click the connector. and click to place the pipe. right-click the top DCW connector. 30 In the plan view. 36 Move the cursor to the left. enter 3' . select 3/4''. under Pipe Types. enter 0”/12”. and press Enter. 37 On the Options Bar. verify that Automatically Connect is selected. 31 On the Options Bar.2 7/8''. 32 Move the cursor to the right. click to the left of the urinal. connect the second toilet. enter 7''. 29 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Diameter.

Creating the Cold Water System | 255 . select Connector 1 : Domestic Cold Water : Round : 1'' : In. and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 40 Click Modify. 41 Select the top sink. (Status Bar indicates Horizontal and [Pipes : Pipe Types : Water]). and click to connect to the main cold water line. 43 Click the branch cold water pipe.39 Move the cursor to the left. and click OK. The sink is connected to the cold water branch piping. 42 In the Select Connector dialog.

and add piping to connect the sinks in the menu’s room to the system. add a water heater. connect the middle sink to the branch pipe. Creating the Hot Water System In this exercise. 256 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 45 Close the file with or without saving it.44 Using the same method. you create the hot water system.

5 In the System Browser. expand the Unassigned folder. 4 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. select the 3 sinks. Creating the Hot Water System | 257 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Design ➤ Floor Plans.Design is open. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser. Notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) are listed. 6 In the plan view.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing . and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_06_i.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 2 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. and verify that Level 1 .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Overall.Plumbing Plan . and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. and expand the Default Domestic Hot Water system. while pressing Ctrl.

a best practice to maximize operation is to assign all components to the appropriate system and clear the default folders.7 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Hot Water. in the Unassigned folder. Default Other folders are created and the Water Heater is listed. enter Domestic Hot Water 107. 13 In the plan view. In later steps. and click OK. 12 In the Type Selector. Default Domestic Hot Water. click to position the water heater in the lower left corner of the utility room above the bathroom.) Add the water heater to DCW 107 16 Select a sink in the men’s room. When designing systems. under Water Heater . the Domestic Hot Water 107 system is listed along with the 3 sinks (lavatories). 14 Click Modify. 8 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ System Properties. as shown. you edit the system to add equipment. verify that DCW 107 is selected. and click Edit System. Default Domestic Cold Water. Add a water heater 11 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog. (The folders are created according to the connectors available on the hot water heater. for System Name. 17 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel.6 Gallon. select 0.Tankless. 15 In the System Browser. You add the water heater to the Domestic Cold Water system first. 258 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 10 In the System Browser.

Connect the water heater to the cold water supply 20 In the plan view. as shown. 27 Click Modify. click Finish Editing System. select the water heater. right-click the middle left connector. enter 10’. 19 Select the water heater. 26 Move the cursor to the right. 24 Move the cursor up. 22 In the Type Selector. Slope: 0''/12''. 25 On the Options Bar. and press Enter. Creating the Hot Water System | 259 . specify: ■ ■ ■ Diameter: 1''. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. and click the water main line. 23 On the Options Bar. The tankless water heater is connected to the cold water supply. and select Draw Pipe. enter 1' 6''. verify that Automatically Connect is selected. Offset: 4' 6''. 21 On the Placement Tools panel. for Offset.18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. and on the Edit System panel.

for Offset. and on the Placement Tools panel. 260 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 31 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. click Finish Editing System. 38 Move the cursor to the right. 33 On the Edit System panel. click Automatically Connect to switch it off. select a sink. 35 On the Options Bar. and for Offset. enter 1''. and click just to the left of the cold water pipe. select Domestic Hot Water 107. enter 1' 6''. 37 On the Options Bar. enter 9' 0''. 32 Click the tankless hot water heater. and click Draw Pipe. and in the System Selector. right-click the bottom connector (domestic hot water). for Diameter. Connect the water heater to the hot water supply 34 Select the water heater. click Edit System. 29 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. 30 On the System Tools panel. select 4'-6''.Add the water heater to Domestic Hot Water 107 28 In the plan view. 36 Move the cursor down. as shown. and press Enter.

39 Move the cursor down. 40 On the Options Bar. 41 Move the cursor down. enter 2' 8''. and press Enter. Creating the Hot Water System | 261 . for Offset. 42 Click Modify. as shown. and click just above the bottom sink. enter 1’.

45 Using the same method and the Connect Into tool. 44 Select the horizontal pipe that you just drew. 262 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . select the left sink (the one closest to the urinal). The hot water pipe is automatically connected to the sink.43 In the 3D view. connect the other 2 sinks to the hot water pipe. and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.

Creating the Hot Water System | 263 . 47 Optional: Open the RME_Plumb_Design_07_i.46 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt project and view the vent piping for the plumbing system.

264 .

Creating a Fire Protection System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a fire protection system. 265 .

266 .

with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise.Planning a Fire Protection System 11 The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_01_i. You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess the coverage for the fire protection systems. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. 2 Right-click Standard.autodesk. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. After finishing each exercise. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. However. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. In this tutorial. click Training Files. and click Duplicate. Specifying Pipe Settings In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. A copy is made of the Standard pipe type. 267 . you will create a wet fire protection system for the second floor of an office building. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial. you can choose to save your work. go to http://www. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. If the tutorial training files are not present. You create a new pipe type.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you begin work on the project that contains a wet fire protection system. In this lesson. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model.

You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping. and click Properties. Configure pipe conversion settings 7 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. you create a sprinkler zone project parameter. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. you create project parameters and work with schedules. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches. 10 Close the file with or without saving it. you created a new pipe type for the wet fire protection system and modified its type properties. for Material. under Mechanical. or architectural components. Next. and then click OK. However. In the next exercise. verify that 9' 0" is specified. For Pipe Type. structural beams. click Rename. For Offset. select Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion ➤ Branch. For System Type. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. For Offset. and enter Fire Protection Wet. Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. 9 Click OK. This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. Level 2 is the referenced level for the views where you will be designing. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is listed. For Pipe Type. select Fire Protection Wet. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. In this exercise. verify that 9' 0" is selected. you modify the type properties of the pipe. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. In the left pane.3 Right-click the copy (Standard 2). For System Type. 268 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. 6 In the Project Browser. Determining Zone Requirements In this exercise. 4 Right-click Fire Protection Wet. duct. select Main. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. You also configured the conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems. 8 In the Mechanical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. so the pipe main will be offset from level 2. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display. You then assign spaces in the top portion of the plan to one zone and spaces in the bottom portion to another zone. select Fire Protection Wet. select Carbon Steel.

enter Sprinkler Zone. click Add. the space crossing lines display. Under Categories. select Fire Protection. Determining Zone Requirements | 269 .Fire Protection Plan . right-click. 6 In the drawing area. For Group parameter under.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . for Sprinkler Zone. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. select Spaces. You draw a crossing window from the lower left to the upper right of the area you want to enclose. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_02_i.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. under Fire Protection. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . click Training Files. 8 Using a crossing window. When you highlight a space using the cursor. and then click OK. and click Element Properties.Design is highlighted. indicating that it’s the active view. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. select space Instruction 221 as shown. for Name. select the upper half of the building. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 Click OK twice. enter Zone 1.

270 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_03_i. and then click OK. to which you add various parameters. 15 Press Esc to clear the selection. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.rvt. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule In this exercise. and then access instance properties. for Sprinkler Zone. and click OK. including a calculated value parameter.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. under Fire Protection. verify that only Spaces are selected. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. You modify the schedules and add an embedded schedule in order to use the schedule as a design tool. for Sprinkler Zone. 12 In the Instance Properties dialog. filter the bottom half of the building to select only Spaces. 10 In the Filter dialog. you create schedules for sprinkler design. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. select Zone 1. 13 Using the same method. click Training Files. enter Zone 2. under Fire Protection. and then click OK.

9 On the Formatting tab. click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Rows: New. create a parameter named Maximum Coverage Area that is an Area type and is grouped under Fire Protection. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities.Fire Protection Plan . 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 271 . ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a schedule parameter 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Maximum Spacing. enter Maximum Spacing. double-click on each column separator. click the Formatting tab. For Units.Design is highlighted. For Type of Parameter. 11 Click OK twice. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . For Name. select Spaces. 13 To resize the column widths in the schedule. Add schedule data 12 Select the header in the Key Name column and enter Protection Area Type as the new header. 10 In the Format dialog. indicating that it’s the active view. 8 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Feet and fractional inches. and on the ribbon. select Length. In the Maximum Spacing column. Obstructed-Combustible. select To the nearest 1'.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . do the following: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings.Create a key schedule 1 In the Project Browser. For Rounding. 15 In the new row: ■ ■ In the Protection Area Type column. enter Light. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. enter 15. For Group parameter under. 7 Click OK. The schedule displays. select Fire Protection. 6 Using the same method. for Name. Click OK. 14 Select the new header. Select Schedule keys. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter data. For Key name. Click OK. click Add Parameter. enter Sprinkler Spacing and Coverage Area Schedule. enter Protection Area Construction Type. and click Field Format.

under Available fields. Obstructed-Noncombustible Extra. add more schedule data: Protection Area Type Light. based on the parameter settings you specified previously. NOTE The units of measure display automatically. Obstructed-Combustible Ordinary. 18 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Category. and press Enter. Click OK. Specify fields and create a calculated value parameter ■ In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ On the Fields tab.■ In the Maximum Coverage Area column. For Name. Unobstructed Extra. enter Sprinkler Schedule. Unobstructed Ordinary. Obstructed-Combustible Extra. select Spaces. double-click in the order listed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Sprinkler Zone Level Area Protection Area Construction Type 272 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . Obstructed-Noncombustible Ordinary. 16 Using the same method. Unobstructed Maximum Spacing 15' Maximum Coverage Area 200 SF 15' 12' 12' 12' 15' 15' 200 SF 90 SF 90 SF 90 SF 130 SF 130 SF 15' 130 SF Create a sprinkler schedule 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. Obstructed-Noncombustible Light. enter 130.

select Number. select Common. This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what spaces meet the sprinkler design requirements. select Sprinkler Zone. The resulting formula is Area/Maximum Coverage Area. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. For Discipline. The Sprinkler Schedule displays. The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list). For Formula. Select Header and Blank line. click . Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 273 . select Minimum Sprinklers. select Level. select Area. 20 On the Formatting tab. For Then by. and click OK. for Sort by. select 0 decimal place. For Units. Organize schedule data 23 Right-click in the schedule. and click Field Format. 21 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. click Edit. and then use the method learned previously to select Maximum Coverage Area from the Fields dialog. Enter the formula operator / after Area. for Sorting/Grouping. and click View Properties. For Type. In the Fields dialog. enter Minimum Sprinklers. 22 Click OK twice. 25 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. For Rounding. select Fixed.■ ■ ■ ■ Maximum Coverage Area Maximum Spacing Click Calculated Value. under Other. Click OK. 19 Click the Formatting tab.

select Level. for Filter by. 274 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . 29 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 26 Click OK 3 times. For Fields. select Grand totals. At the bottom of the dialog.■ ■ ■ ■ Select Header and Blank line. select Level equals Level 2. for Filter. select Sprinkler Zone. and then click Field Format. 27 In the drawing area. For Fields. The schedule is arranged and sorted as specified. select Number. select Hidden field. select Minimum Sprinklers. and click View Properties. click Edit. and then select Hidden field. and select Totals only. 28 In the Instance Properties dialog. verify that Use default settings is selected. ■ In the Format dialog. right-click the schedule. On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Fields. Under Field formatting. For Then by (second instance). 30 Click OK twice.

33 Click in the grouped header cell. For Category. ■ ■ ■ 38 Click OK 3 times. use click and drag to select the last 4 schedule column headers. select Count. double-click Type. select Embedded Schedule. select Grand totals. 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Embedded Schedule tab. click Edit. On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. for Available fields. delete the word Maximum. 32 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Headers: Group. for Embedded Schedule. Group schedule columns 31 In the drawing area. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 275 . 34 In the Maximum Coverage Area column and in the Maximum Spacing column. under Other.The schedule is filtered to show only zones on level 2. On the Formatting tab. 36 In the Instance Properties dialog. select Calculate totals. select Sprinklers. and select Totals only. for Fields. and click View Properties. System Name. Create an embedded schedule 35 Right-click the schedule. and enter Maximum Sprinkler Spacing and Area Coverage. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. and Count. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. Under Field formatting.

IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. 48 In the floor plan. select Light. notice that there is nothing specified for Protection Area Construction Type. This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). 47 In the Instance Properties dialog. select space 221 Instruction. click in the floor plan to make it the active view. When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system. 52 Click OK. Unobstructed. each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. under Identity Data. 41 In the plan view. Unobstructed. select Ordinary. under Identity Data. The parameter change is evident in the schedule. you are actually editing information in a database of building information. 50 Access the instance properties. use a selection box to select the upper half of the building.Fire Protection Plan Design. 43 Click Cancel. and click OK.Modify space properties from the schedule 39 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 44 In the schedule. Unobstructed. 40 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile to tile the floor plan and the Sprinkler Schedule. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for Protection Area Construction Type. select space 221 Instruction. for Protection Area Construction Type. Notice also that the Maximum Spacing and Maximum Coverage Area parameters that you created are listed under Fire Protection. 49 Filter the selection for spaces only. Notice that the selection you made in the schedule displays in the dialog. As a result. 51 In the Instance Properties dialog. and the spacing parameter values are evident. and access the instance properties. 42 In the Instance Properties dialog. 276 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . double-click FP . but their values are not determined. under Identity Data. 46 With the space still selected. 45 For Protection Area Construction Type. select Ordinary.

Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 277 .53 Close the file with or without saving it.

278 .

FP_Ceiling to make it the active view. As you create the system. Place host-based sprinklers 1 In the Project Browser. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to create a fire protection system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. you will understand the process. If the tutorial training files are not present. Adding Sprinklers In this exercise. and double-click Level 2 . By following the recommended workflow. You will use the sprinkler schedule that you created in a previous exercise as a design guide for sprinkler placement.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_01_i. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. At the end of this tutorial. However. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially.Designing a Fire Protection System 12 In this tutorial. you create a wet fire protection system using a linked architectural model of a building project. you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan. go to http://www. As you place the sprinklers.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans. and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems in Revit MEP. After finishing each exercise. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. 279 . you can choose to save your work. methodology. hosted to the linked architectural ceiling family. click Training Files. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP. you place host-based sprinklers in a ceiling plan view. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded.autodesk. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

the layout path feature will attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers. After placing the initial sprinkler. IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion of a layout path to physical piping in later exercises. there is insufficient space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail. 3 In the Project Browser. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Sprinkler Schedule. 280 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 6 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient. When there is a small misalignment. you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of ceiling grids. When this happens. and arrange the views so that they are tiled horizontally. 5 Click in the ceiling plan to make it the active view.2 Zoom in to the spaces in the lower right corner of the building. Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently separated to allow space for fittings.

You can use the Minimum Sprinklers column in the schedule as guidance when you design the fire protection system. Notice that the sprinkler schedule updates to show the sprinklers you added in space 202. because it calculates the number of sprinklers needed for each space and the maximum distance between sprinklers. 10 Press Esc twice. 8 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face. Continue placing sprinklers You copy the existing sprinklers to place other sprinklers in spaces 203 and 204. place the cursor over the approximate center of the ceiling tiles. and click to place 3 sprinklers.Semi-Recessed Hosted : 1/2" Pendent from the Type Selector drop-down.7 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. select the sprinklers that you placed. and select Sprinkler . Adding Sprinklers | 281 . as shown. 9 In space Instruction 202. while pressing Ctrl. 11 In the drawing area. because the schedule indicates that each of those spaces requires a minimum of 3 sprinklers.Pendent .

you place non-hosted sprinklers.12 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. and that Copy and Multiple are selected. 13 On the Options Bar. Also. as shown. 15 Select points in the 2 spaces to the left. the cursor changes to indicate that the Copy tool is active. Copies of the sprinklers are placed after you specify the end point. 282 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 14 Select the upper left corner near the copy selection as the copy start point. Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection. and then press Esc. verify that Constrain is cleared. Next.

For Number.Fire Protection Plan . and click Element Properties. you adjust the offset. it must be positioned above the piping to which it will be connected. enter 10' 6". 28 Click the center of the existing sprinkler as the start point. click to place a sprinkler at the beginning of the corridor as shown. and array the sprinklers in the 3 spaces that comprise the Corridor (200A. and select Sprinkler-Upright : 1/2" Upright from the Type Selector drop-down. open Design ➤ FP . and then click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 23 Right-click the sprinkler. click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array. indicating that the design requirements for the corridor spaces have been met. Array sprinklers 26 With the sprinkler still selected. zoom in to the entire wing in the lower right of the building. 22 In the 200A Corridor space. This specifies an elevation for the sprinkler that makes it visible in the Level 2 . Next. by adding the minimum number of sprinklers for the 3 corridor spaces combined. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. enter 14' 6".Place non-hosted sprinklers In this section. Adding Sprinklers | 283 .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 20 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. 21 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. and then tile the floor plan and schedule views horizontally. 18 Type WT. under Constraints. Because this is an upright sprinkler with its connector facing down.Design. you place non-hosted sprinklers. Because the sprinkler is not hosted. move the cursor to the right.FP_Ceiling view. Notice that the schedule updates. 200B. 19 In the floor plan. and press Enter. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Group And Associate. You place the system components based on the design requirements (sprinkler count and spacing) indicated in the schedule. 29 Press Esc. This number is determined in the schedule. 16 Close the ceiling plan view. specify a vertical offset. and 200C). for Offset. 17 In the Project Browser. it’s added to the space at an offset of 0' 0". 25 Click OK. enter 11.

This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP. A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers. 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. you placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement methods. However. indicating that it’s the active view.Fire Protection Plan . you use the Layout Path tools to create the initial layout for the piping.Design is highlighted. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. In this exercise.30 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt. You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers. physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing. In the next exercise.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_02_i. piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing. and then creating the logical connection between these system components. After creating the logical connection. Unlike logical connections (systems). This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. Then you simplify the layout using Modify tools from the Generate Layout tab on the ribbon to modify pipe branches prior to converting the layout to piping. 284 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and with piping (physical connection). verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . you create a wet sprinkler system and add piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you connect the sprinklers by creating a system (logical connection).

5 Right-click the header. The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red to indicate that the new system is selected. In the System Browser. named Fire Protection Wet. Connect sprinklers with a system 7 Draw a selection box (from left to right) around the sprinklers in the office spaces. and assign the selected sprinklers to it. they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. The Fire Protection Wet system is created and listed in the System Browser. IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder. within the Piping Systems folder. 4 Drag the System Browser so that it docks at the bottom of the drawing area.2 Zoom in to the wing at the lower right of the building. and select Piping. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. 8 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Fire Protection Wet to create a fire protection wet system. Explore the System Browser 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 6 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet 1 system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building. click View ➤ Systems. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. as shown. As you assign sprinklers to systems. all of the selected sprinklers have been moved from the Default Fire Protection Wet folder to the new system folder. Creating a Piping System | 285 .

In the left pane. expand Fire Protection Wet ➤ FP Wet_Zone2 to see the included sprinklers. For Offset. you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. 10 Right-click Fire Protection Wet 1. Next. 13 In the System Browser. select an initial piping layout.Now that the sprinklers are logically connected. click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 16 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 19 Click OK. 15 In the drawing area. system equipment. NOTE The Generate Layout feature is available whenever a system component is selected. and select the system. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red. 286 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . verify that Main is selected. and a piping layout preview displays. You also verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. 18 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. verify that 9' 0" is specified. For Pipe Type. 12 On the Options Bar. enter FP Wet_Zone2. providing system editing tools. click Settings. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above level 2.Wet is selected. 14 Click Finish Editing System. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch. ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Solutions. Create the initial layout The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system. indicating the logical connection. for System Name. select Branch. and number of elements in the system. Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser. and on the Options Bar. 11 With the system still selected. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection . press Tab. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. The Generate Layout tools are activated. The Edit Piping System panel displays. select a sprinkler that belongs to FP Wet_Zone2. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet 1 system logically connects the sprinklers. and click Select. and make preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout. double-click the Fire Protection Wet 1 system listing to view the list of sprinklers. place the cursor over a sprinkler. Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to physical piping.

21 Click in the upper right corner of the stairwell to place the base component. enter -12' 0". and select solution 5.20 On the Generate Layout panel. The layout path solution displays (blue represents the main piping run. for Diameter. When the layout is finished. 22 On the Options Bar. 25 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Solution Type. click Place Base. The main piping preview connects to the base component in the stairwell. click Solutions. as shown. 23 For Offset. 24 On the Generate Layout panel. these settings will convert the base component to a 2" riser that extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (9' 0"). and green represents branch lines). Modify the layout 26 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout. The base component provides a source for the fire protection system. the method for moving segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping: ■ Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an displays at the junction. In general. Use the arrow keys to view all the solutions. (elbow control) Creating a Piping System | 287 . verify that Network is selected. select 2".

On the Generate Layout panel. The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created. This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the 3 offices on level 2. click Modify. A (parallel movement control) displays. 27 Select the horizontal layout path segment connecting to the base point. as shown. All of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically generated. 29 Click Finish Layout. 288 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired location. and then drag the (elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview. 28 Drag the parallel movement control up to a point between the office/corridor walls and the corridor sprinklers.■ Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction control) displays at the junction.

31 Zoom in to the area with the sprinkler system. Next. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System In this exercise. you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system. or that offset elevations are incorrect. or manually modify the pipe. and various manual pipe creation tools. select a different layout solution. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 289 . You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them. and then you create piping to physically connect them. View the system in 3D 30 Open FP . The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create a pipe or a fitting.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. the Connect Into tool. Either relocate the system components.IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing. you complete the wet system by adding the remaining sprinklers to the FP Wet_Zone2 system using the Layout Path tool. 32 If necessary. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines.

verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_03_i. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines.Design is highlighted.Fire Protection Plan .rvt. 1 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 290 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 2 Zoom in. 3 If necessary. click Training Files.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and select the elbow fitting as shown. indicating that it’s the active view. 4 Click the left plus sign to upgrade the fitting to a tee.

verify that Network is selected. 14 Close the System Browser. and select solution 5. IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers. 11 On the Generate Layout panel. Add remaining sprinklers to FP Wet_Zone2 system 15 In the drawing area. 9 On the Edit System panel. radiators. air terminals. select any sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. click Add To System. 10 Select a sprinkler in the corridor. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 291 . 18 Click Finish Editing System. or a system component to display system tools. The layout automatically creates a path connecting to the tee created earlier. and click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. you can select the pipe or duct. 6 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System so that you can add sprinklers to the system. verify that Solutions is selected. draw a selection box from lower left to upper right around the sprinklers as shown (don’t include the last 3 sprinklers). 13 Click Finish Layout.The tee provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for the sprinklers in the corridor. 16 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. The selected sprinklers are assigned to FP Wet_Zone2. and pipe or duct is created. Notice that the number of system elements updates on the Options Bar. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). System tools display on the Piping Systems tab. select a sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. 8 In the corridor. for Solution Type. mechanical equipment. 17 Use a selection box to select the remaining 3 sprinklers. 12 On the Options Bar. You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser. 7 On the Edit Piping System panel. click Finish Editing System. 5 In the drawing area. Connect the sprinklers with pipe 19 Zoom to the 3 spaces at the right end of the corridor. and so on) are logically connected by a system.

28 In the drawing area. Notice that horizontal and vertical segments of pipe were added. and select the leftmost unconnected sprinkler. 21 In the Piping Plan. 29 Using the same method. right-click. and then press Esc. and select the horizontal segment of main piping as shown. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . click the intersection with the horizontal main pipe as the pipe endpoint. 292 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . draw pipe from the last unconnected sprinkler to the main pipe. 27 On the Options Bar. pan and zoom to the next unconnected sprinkler. and then tile the views.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. 24 In the Piping Plan. 23 View the result in the 3D view. 26 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. and click Draw Pipe. select 9'. 22 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 25 Select the sprinkler.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down.20 Open Design ➤ FP . for Offset. zoom in to the corridor above the spaces that have piping.

Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 293 . zoom so that you can see the entire wing with the fire protection system. and press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. 32 Use the cursor to highlight a section of the pipe. Because the whole system highlights. 31 In the plan view.Layout in 2D Layout in 3D Verify connectivity 30 Close the 3D view. it’s a visual indication that all components are connected correctly.

5 Draw the section: ■ In the drawing area.Design is highlighted. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 2 Zoom to the offices in the lower right corner. double-click on the section head to open the section view. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_04_i. Specify section properties 7 In the drawing area.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Scale. indicating that it’s the active view. 294 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. you create a section view that you will use to work with vertical piping. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. You also place a hose reel cabinet in the building and connect it to the supply standpipe. Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Options Bar. click outside the corridor wall at the stairs to specify the section line start point. select 1/4" = 1'-0". ■ 6 Press Esc.Fire Protection Plan . Click at the staircase to specify the section line endpoint.Adding Vertical Supply Piping In this exercise. click Training Files.

8 Right-click, and click View Properties. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Graphics, for Sub-Discipline, select FP - Design. For View Classification, select Design. Under Identity Data, for View Name, enter FP Section_Stair. For Default View Template, select MEP Section. Click OK.

10 In the Project Browser, right-click Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ Sections ➤ FP Section_Stair, and click Apply Default View Template. 11 Zoom to the top near the horizontal pipe. 12 If necessary, drag the top section boundary line up. 13 Select the elbow fitting, and then click the top + grip to upgrade the elbow fitting to a tee. 14 Select the tee fitting, and then right-click the top connector, and click Draw Pipe. 15 Press Spacebar. 16 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel, and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection - Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. 17 Move the cursor up, enter 7', and press Enter.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 295

18 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 19 Make Level 2 - Fire Protection Plan - Design the active view. Add mechanical equipment 20 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 21 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel, and select M_Hose Reel Cabinet Surface Mounted : 1"25mm from the drop-down list. 22 In the drawing area, click on the wall (host face) near the stairs to place the cabinet as shown, and then click Modify.

23 In the section view, zoom to the hose reel cabinet. 24 Select the cabinet, right-click the connector on the left of the cabinet, and click Draw Pipe.

296 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

25 Verify that Fire Protection - Wet is selected from the Type Selector drop-down. 26 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 2"50mm. 27 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is active. 28 Connect to the vertical pipe (using the Intersection and Horizontal snaps), and then click Modify.

29 Close the section view. Add a valve 30 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 31 In the alert dialog, click Yes to load a family. 32 In the Open dialog, navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Gate Valve - 2-12 Inch.rfa, and click Open. 33 In the Type Selector, verify that Gate Valve - 2" is selected. 34 Select the midpoint of the horizontal pipe that extends from the cabinet, as shown, and then click Modify.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 297

A 2" gate valve is placed in the 2" diameter pipe.

35 Open 3D Fire Protection, and zoom in to the cabinet to see the valve in 3D.

36 Close the file with or without saving it.

298 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modifying Pipe Diameters
In this exercise, you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications. Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers, you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers. Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_05_i.rvt.

Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ 3D Views, and double-click 3D Fire Protection to make it the active view. 2 Enter WT to tile the 3D and floor plan views, and arrange them so that they’re tiled horizontally. 3 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown. You will work primarily in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view.

NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter, height, or width. Changing the diameter, width, or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter, width, or height. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers, and because the design specifications require a 1 inch diameter for pipes servicing 2 sprinklers, it’s more efficient to specify 1 inch diameter for all pipe runs, and then adjust branches servicing more than 2 sprinklers separately. 4 In the floor plan view, starting at the lower left corner of the wing, draw a selection box around the level 2 fire protection piping until just past the section line (don’t include the supply pipe or hose reel cabinet).

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 299

5 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 6 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Pipe Fittings and Pipes, and click OK. 7 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 1". 8 Click Modify. All selected piping is now 1" diameter.

Tag the pipes 9 In the floor plan view, zoom in to the right half of the wing (including the stairs). 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 11 Click to select a segment of pipe in the corridor. 12 If necessary, click Yes to load tags in the alert dialog, . 13 Navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Pipe Size Tag.rfa, and click Open. 14 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Verify that Horizontal is selected. Clear Leader.

15 Place the cursor over the pipe segments shown, and after each segment highlights, click to place the tag. The tags accurately display the size of the selected pipe segments.

NOTE Tags are view specific. They display only in the view in which they were placed. Press Esc.

300 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modify the diameter of the main 16 In the 3D view, select the linked architectural file. 17 On the View Control Bar, click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. By hiding the linked file, you isolate the piping to make it easier to select. 18 In the 3D view, select the vertical pipe below the hose cabinet.

19 Place the cursor over the section of main pipe feeding the last sprinkler, and when the section highlights, press Tab. This highlights the piping between the vertical pipe and the last segement. 20 Click to select the main piping between these points. The main piping is selected and displays in red.

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 301

select 4". for Diameter. The diameter of the fire protection main piping changes.21 On the Options Bar. 302 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .

23 Close the 3D view. change the diameter of the other top segments to 1 1/4" to accommodate sprinklers.22 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 25 On the Options Bar. 24 In the drawing area. Modify the diameter of branch pipes The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch. select the top segment of branch pipe in space Instruction 202 (next to the stairs). Modifying Pipe Diameters | 303 . for Diameter. The pipe diameter is modified. and then tag the piping as shown. and maximize the floor plan. as shown. select 1 1/4". 26 Using the same method.

28 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ 05_Fire Protection Systems folder under Training Files. you created a wet fire protection system.27 This completes the Fire Protection tutorial. 304 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2. allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems. you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems. For additional practice. The pipe run now complies with the design criteria. You added tags to pipes. In this exercise. The completed fire protection system is included in the RME_FP_Design_06_i. You learned how to manually change the diameter of a pipe. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet system. In this tutorial. and the difference between how the software sizes pipe and how to manually modify pipe diameter.

create details. add annotations and dimensions. and create schedules for construction documentation for a project. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to create views.Documenting a Project In this tutorial. 305 .

306 .

and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. right-click Copy of Level 1. dependent views. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 duct plan 1 In the Project Browser. a plumbing isometric riser from a 3D design view.Creating Documentation Views 13 In this lesson. 2 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_01_i. right-click Level 1. and view references. You then change the properties of the new view by applying a view template.rvt. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and click OK. and click Rename. you’d select Duplicate with Detailing. callout views for a typical HVAC view and a detail view. 3 In the Rename View dialog.Design ➤ Floor Plans. under Floor Plans. If the view included detail graphics. and apply a view template. You select Duplicate because only model elements are included in the original view. you duplicate an existing floor plan view to create a duct plan view. and click Properties. 307 . Apply a view template 4 In the Project Browser. You learn to create: ■ ■ ■ ■ a duplicate plan view. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. matchlines. you begin the construction documentation for the building project.

10 In the drawing area. Creating Dependent Views Because large buildings cannot fit on a single sheet at 1/8" = 1' scale. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. 6 Click View tab ➤ Sheet Composition panel ➤ Matchline. Dependent views keep the primary/parent view as the working drawing and allow you to create smaller. verify that the top and bottom constraints are Unlimited. 9 Click OK. You crop a dependent view to show only the area marked by the matchline. 11 Click beyond the exterior wall of the wing to specify the second point. You can modify the visibility of matchlines in specific views. 3 In the Rename View dialog. select HVAC Duct Plan-Documentation. 7 Click Create Matchline Sketch tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Matchline Properties. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 6 In the Project Browser. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. views and put them on the sheet. and click OK. and then press Esc. as shown. Duplicate a view to create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. you use dependent views to accommodate such large buildings. click Training Files. click to specify the first point of the matchline to the left of the plan and below gridline C. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. more focused. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_02_i.rvt.5 In the Instance Properties dialog. The smaller (dependent) views inherit view properties and view-specific elements from the primary view. to delineate splits in a large floor plan. 5 Make sure Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is the active view. and the floor plan is moved to its new location in the Project Browser hierarchy. 4 Using the same method. 308 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click Apply Default View Template. create dependent views for areas B and C. The view is automatically updated with the defined graphical style. and click OK. This is useful when breaking up plans with varying geometries across levels. 2 Right-click the dependent view title. and click Rename. under Identity Data ➤ Default View Template. Create matchlines Matchlines are used with dependent views. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

select 11./ ---). and then press Esc. click above and below the modified matchline to create view references (displayed as . 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. on the Options Bar. and click OK. select Double Dash 5/8". 17 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. For Line Weight. 19 In the drawing area. 20 Select the upper view reference and. Creating view references 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ View Reference. 13 Press Esc twice. select Floor Plan: Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. for Target view. Modify object styles 15 Zoom in to the left part of the upper matchline. Creating Dependent Views | 309 . For Line Pattern. Click OK. 21 Using the same method. select Matchline: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Line Color. apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B to the other view reference. click the current value. select black.12 Draw a second matchline that spans the floor plan above gridline H. 14 Click Finish Matchline. In the Color dialog.

drag Plan_B onto Sheet M202 and Plan_C onto Sheet M203. 28 Make Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan the active view. 24 Use the grips on the crop lines to modify the view boundaries. Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C 26 Open Sheet M201.22 Add a view reference below the lower matchline. 23 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. 310 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . indicating the detail and sheet number of each view. and zoom to each of the view references. and drag Plan_A from the Project Browser onto the sheet. 27 Using the same method. as shown. crop the dependent views for plans B and C. and apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C to it. 25 Using the same method. The view references in the primary view are automatically updated as the views are placed on sheets.

and click to select it. 3 Click Modify Section Boxes tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin.Domestic Water. In the left pane of the Open dialog. right-click 3D Plumbing. and click Apply Default View Template. 2 Zoom in. 4 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of 3D Plumbing. for View Name. select Documentation. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_03_i. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 311 . Under Graphics. and select the section box. you copy a 3D design view and modify it to create a 3D plumbing isometric riser for domestic water. For Sub-Discipline. right-click Plumbing Isometric . and click Properties. select Plumbing Isometric. 6 In the Project Browser. press Tab twice to highlight the pipe run.29 Close the file with or without saving it. click Training Files.Domestic Water. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing-Design ➤ 3D Views. For Default View Template.rvt. 5 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. The section crop lines no longer display. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Duplicate a view and specify properties 1 In the Project Browser. select Plumbing. You pin the view to keep it from being moved inadvertently. for View Classification. enter Plumbing Isometric . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser In this exercise. Click OK. 8 Highlight a segment of the top horizontal piping. 7 Zoom in to the plumbing system. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

select 3. The selected piping displays as a dashed line. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. 10 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. For Pattern. 12 Using the same method.9 Right-click. 11 Select the vertical segment of pipe coming off the tankless water heater. and then click OK. Click Apply. change the line weight to 4 and the line pattern to Dash Dot 3/16". select Dash. press Tab 3 times. 312 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and click to select it.

13 Highlight a segment of horizontal pipe below the sinks. This hides the sanitary piping in order to create a domestic water supply riser isometric view. as shown). press Tab 3 times (until the entire pipe network highlights. and click to select it. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 313 . and click Hide in View ➤ Elements. 14 Right-click.

17 Label the fixtures as shown. click Reveal Hidden Elements. create a sanitary riser isometric view: ■ Duplicate the Plumbing Isometric . On the View Control Bar.Sanitary Waste. highlight a segment of the sanitary piping. and rename the new view Plumbing Isometric . click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. press Tab 3 times. and click Unhide in view ➤ Elements. In the drawing area. 314 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 18 Using methods learned previously. Right-click. and then click in empty space in the drawing to end the label. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and click to select it.Domestic Water view with detailing. On the View Control Bar. click Close Reveal Hidden Elements. Click in the drawing area to start a text label.15 Press Esc. Unhide the sanitary waste piping: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the View Control Bar. ■ ■ ■ Hide domestic cold water and domestic hot water piping.

Creating Callout Views | 315 . In the Format dialog. 23 Click on the horizontal pipe below the sinks to select it. 25 Press Esc twice. 22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Spot Slope. When the view is associated with a sheet. 20 In the Project Units dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Discipline. 21 Click OK twice.Add a spot slope annotation 19 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Units. 24 Move the cursor above the pipe. the callout head on the original view is updated with the sheet information. as shown. verify that Common is selected. click on the Format value. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. for Rounding. For Slope. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. you use a plan view to create a callout view. select To the nearest 1/8". and click to place the spot slope annotation. and then place the callout view on a sheet.

3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. indicating that it’s the active view. for Scale. 2 Zoom in to an office in Area C (the bottom section of the plan). select 1/4"=1'-0''. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is highlighted. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. 7 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ Select the callout boundary. and select Floor Plan from the Type Selector drop-down. 4 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. beginning at the upper left and ending at the lower right. 316 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 6 Draw the callout around the ductwork as shown. 5 On the Options Bar. click Training Files. and move it to the bottom right corner of the boundary. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_04_i.rvt. Select the Drag Head control (the control on the leader line that is closest to the callout head).

13 In the Project Browser.8 Create an angled leader line by dragging the Drag control located at the center of the leader as shown. and click in the empty space at the top center to place it.HVAC Duct Plan & Sections. Creating Callout Views | 317 . select Callout of Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. for Line Weight. under Sheets (all). 11 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ For the Callout Boundary category. double-click M601 . ■ Place the view on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. Click OK. Modify callout boundary line weight 9 Press Esc to clear the selection. ■ Expand the Callout Boundary category and. select 5. drag it to the sheet. using the same method. 10 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. change the line weight for the Callout Leader Line to 5.

enter WSHP PART PLAN. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. for View Name. enter Callout of Level 1 HVAC WSHP TYP. right-click the callout view. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. The display of the ductwork changes from coarse detail to fine.Rename the detail view and modify view settings 14 Zoom to the callout view. Click OK. 15 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Ductwork in coarse detail 318 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . For Title on Sheet. and select the viewport. and click Apply Default View Template. For Default View Template. 17 In the Project Browser.

20 Double-click the section head at the left of the stairs to open Room 214 Section. Creating Callout Views | 319 . The detail callout head has been updated with sheet information. 19 Zoom in to the area near the central stairs and section markers.Ductwork in fine detail Create a detail callout 18 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan.

24 Double-click the callout head to open the detail view. 25 In the Project Browser. 23 Draw the callout boundary around the level 1 ductwork as shown. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. and select Detail from the Type Selector drop-down. 320 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and click Rename. and click OK. right-click the detail view. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. and click Apply View Template. The view is changed to a hidden line display and is moved to its new position in the Project Browser hierarchy. and click OK.21 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. 29 Close the file with or without saving it. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Design ➤ Detail Views (Detail). under Names. 27 Right-click Typical WSHP Detail. enter Typical WSHP Detail. 22 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. 26 In the Rename View dialog.

and diffuser tags to an HVAC documentation plan. you learn how to: ■ add text notes. ■ create permanent dimensions in a lighting plan so that you can control the location of specific fixtures. 321 . linetypes.Working with Annotations and Dimensions 14 In this lesson. and annotation to create a legend. ■ work with model-based components. symbols. duct tags.

use the drag grips to modify the text box width and position it so that it doesn’t cross the ductwork or wall. 6 Click to start the text note in between 2 of the branch ducts serving the perimeter supply air grilles. as shown. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. under Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans. double-click Level 2 HVAC Duct Plan to make it the active view.Creating Annotations In this exercise. 5 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Center). In the left pane of the Open dialog. and enter RUN DUCT THROUGH OPEN WEB JOISTS. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_01_i. you work with tag and leader types to create an annotated HVAC documentation plan. 7 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Add a text note to an HVAC documentation plan 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. 322 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .rvt. 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 8 With the text still selected. 2 Zoom in to the offices in the lower right corner of the building in Area C. and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down.

Add leaders 10 Select the text box. 12 Use the leader end grips to drag the arrows to point to the 2 branch ducts. 16 In the drawing area. Add diffuser and duct tags by category 14 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. and then click Right Straight. Use the leader segment grips to create horizontal leader segments from the text box. 15 On the Options Bar. select a supply diffuser. 11 Click Modify Text Notes tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Add Leader: Left Straight. as shown. a return diffuser. verify that Leader is cleared. Creating Annotations | 323 .9 Press Esc twice. and a segment of rectangular duct. 13 Press Esc to clear the selection. a segment of round duct.

rfa and Flex Duct Tag Round. 324 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . clear Leader. 17 Click Modify. Place a loaded tag and modify its orientation In order to display additional information about an element. Load tags from library 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel drop-down ➤ Loaded Tags. under Category. and click OK. 24 On the Options Bar. 20 In the Tags dialog. and click Open.The information on each tag varies according to the category of element. click Load. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. you can annotate the element with a second tag type. navigate to Annotations ➤ Duct. 22 In the Tags dialog. select Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. tag the remaining diffusers in the area. 21 In the Load Family dialog. move diffuser tags off the ductwork. verify that the Loaded Tag is Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. Tag remaining diffusers 18 Using the same method. for Ducts.rfa. If necessary.

select Horizontal. 31 On the Options Bar. Place tags with leaders 28 In the Project Browser. select the select the large pipe on the right as shown. 32 In the drawing area. 29 Zoom in to the piping near the stairs in the upper right corner of the building in Area A. open Documentation ➤ HVAC-Pipe ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan_A. select the large horizontal segment of rectangular duct and the round duct.25 In the drawing area. 26 On the Options Bar. and Attached End. 27 Select the large segment of rectangular duct connected to the WSHP. 30 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. Leader. as shown. Creating Annotations | 325 . specify Tag Orientation as Vertical. and then press Esc.

34 In the drawing area. 326 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . as shown. for Leader. 35 Click above and to the right of the leader start point to place the leader as shown.33 On the Options Bar. select Free End. click the top horizontal pipe in the corridor.

tag the bottom horizontal pipe as shown. 38 Click Modify Pipe Tags tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. Notice that the new tags you place use the new style. Creating Dimensions | 327 . select the last tag placed. lay out. and all elements of that type are affected.36 Press Esc twice. select Dot Open 1/16". 39 In the Type Properties dialog. Edit a tag type You edit the type properties for the pipe size tag so that you can specify a different leader style. 40 Using the method learned previously. and the tags placed previously have changed to the new style as well. you use temporary dimensions to locate. and lock lighting fixtures. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. 37 In the drawing area. and click OK. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. for Leader Arrowhead. not simply an instance property. That’s because you changed a type property.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_02_i. and then select the interior face of the wall. 2 Zoom in to the left side of the plan. 11 Click in any empty space in the drawing area to finish. 9 Select the reference line at the center of the next fixture to the right. 5 Click to create a permanent dimension. drag the witness line on the right to the face of the wall on the left side of the selected lighting fixture. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. 328 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 3 Select the upper left lighting fixture.rvt. click Training Files. You can modify the preferred condition for dimension face selection. Lay out lighting fixtures using temporary and permanent dimensions 1 In the Project Browser. 12 Press Esc. indicating that it’s the active view. 4 Using the Move Witness Line control. notice that Prefer : Wall faces is selected. 8 Click Modify Dimensions tab ➤ Witness Lines panel ➤ Edit Witness Lines. 10 Repeat for the remaining 2 top fixtures. On the Options Bar. Continue the dimension string using the Edit Witness Lines feature 7 In the drawing area. select the dimension line. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan_A is highlighted.

and press Enter. enter 8'. annotation symbols. 16 Press Esc. Modify dimensions to offset fixtures 17 Select the right lighting fixture in the center line. linework. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click the 3 interior locks on the line. Creating a Legend | 329 .3 1/2"). Because the dimensions are locked. and notes. the fixtures shift to maintain constraints. Creating a Legend In this exercise. 19 Using the same methods. Lock dimensions between fixtures 14 Select the center dimension line. 18 Select the dimension value (7' . add dimension strings for the remaining 2 rows of lighting fixtures in the room. you create an HVAC Sheet Metal legend using model-based legend components.13 Using the same method. and offset them 8' from the wall. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. 15 To lock the dimensions between the interior fixtures. lock the dimensions of the interior fixtures for the remaining 2 rows.

■ 9 In the drawing area. and select 1/4" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. place: ■ ■ ■ Air Terminals : Return Diffuser : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Exhaust Grill : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser .Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 . click Training Files. select Floor Plan. 2 In the New Legend View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. and enter DIFFUSER LEGEND. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_03_i. select 1/4" = 1' -0". For View. Click OK. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ For Family.Sidewall : 18 x 8 330 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 10 Using the same method. 6 Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.rvt. enter Diffuser Legend. Add model element detail components 7 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Legend Component. Create a legend title 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Create a legend view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Legends drop-down ➤ Legend. select Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . 5 Click in the drawing area. For Scale. click below the title to place the diffuser.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel.8 Neck.

14 In the drawing area. Add detail component text descriptions 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Creating a Legend | 331 . 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 15 Using the same method and using the blue dashed reference lines for alignment. and enter SUPPLY DIFFUSER. annotate the remaining components: ■ ■ ■ RETURN DIFFUSER EXHAUST GRILL SIDEWALL SUPPLY DIFFUSER 16 Click Modify.11 Press Esc. and select 1/8" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down list. click next to the top diffuser.

21 Press Esc. 25 Select the center reference line as the mirror line. 18 Select the ELEVATION INCLINE . 22 Zoom in to the copied component. 28 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel. and click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Mirror. and then click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . 20 Click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . 26 Press Esc.DROP and its text note.Create a legend symbol 17 In the Project Browser. 27 While pressing Ctrl. select the top and bottom detail lines on the left side of the component. 19 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 24 Select the component’s break line.RISE symbol for the copy start point. and then press Esc. The selected detail lines are now thin. select Thin Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 23 Delete the arrow and the left 3 lines at the center of the component. open HVAC_SM_DUCT_CONDITION legend view. 332 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 29 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Symbol.DROP symbol to specify the copy end point.

32 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.MECHANICAL LEGEND. 34 Using the method learned previously. 31 Click below the center of the bottom component to place the symbol. and then change the text note to CONNECT NEW DUCT TO EXISTING DUCT.30 Select Spot Elevation . in the Ductwork-Sheet Metal column. 38 Drag Diffuser Legend from the Project Browser to the bottom of the sheet. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ M100 .Target Filled from the Type Selector drop-down. and then click Modify. 35 Change the text on the right to N. Creating a Legend | 333 . and then click Modify. 36 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. enter E. Place legend views on a sheet 37 In the Project Browser. mirror the text on the center reference line of the component. 33 Click to the left of the left break line.

and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. 40 Press Esc.39 With the viewport still selected. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. 334 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel.

rvt. Tag electrical panels 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Double-click the right elevation head to open the Power Riser . click Training Files. and text. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 335 . you will create: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A model-based detail of an electrical power riser diagram. detail groups. indicating that it’s the active view.Detailing 15 In this lesson. you place elevation views on a sheet and then arrange them as a single view in preparation of creating a one-line diagram. A 3D isometric detail view of a typical WSHP Make Up detail. A detail callout that references another view. A drafting view using detail components.113 East elevation view. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. A drafting detail by importing a CAD detail. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Power Plan ➤ Level 1 Power Plan_B is highlighted. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_01_i.

Notice that the software displays a dashed line so that you can align the views as you place them. clear Leader.113 North elevation view from the Project Browser to the empty area at the upper left of sheet E101. 5 In the drawing area. Place views on a sheet 6 In the Project Browser. and click to place it. place Power Riser . you place both the North and East elevation views on a sheet. and then modify and align the views. 7 Drag the Power Riser . Next. 336 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Place the view close to the left edge of the sheet so that there is room in the same space for the east elevation view.Electrical Power Riser Diagram to make it the active view.3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . 8 Using the same method. select each of the 2 panelboards.113 East on the sheet. 4 On the Options Bar.

Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail | 337 . and click OK. right-click. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. Doing this enables you to later drag the 113 East view to the left. enter Electrical Power Riser Diagram. Modify level lines 11 In the drawing area. and click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for Title on Sheet.9 Press Esc. Modify a viewport title 14 Select the title of the 113 North view. and click Deactivate View. under Identity Data. 13 Right-click. giving the appearance of a single view. select the 113 North view. and click Activate View. 12 Select the Level 1 line. 10 Zoom to the power riser elevations on the sheet. and use the filled circle drag control on the right to drag the end of the level line to the right.

20 Select the 113 East elevation view again. 17 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. In the next exercise. as shown. right-click. 21 Using the drag control. and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. and click Activate View.Remove a viewport title display 16 Select the 113 East view. 19 Select the Level 1 line. right-click. you use detail lines to create wiring for the one-line electrical riser diagram. Align elevation views to resemble a single view 18 In the drawing area. select the 113 East elevation view. Creating Detail Wiring In this exercise. you add wiring to the diagram. 22 Press Esc. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. You combine views in order to create a one-line diagram. You also create a detail group and annotate the diagram. 338 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 23 Close the file with or without saving it. move the view to the left so that it overlaps the 113 North view.

click Training Files. 4 In the Line Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. 8 On the Options Bar. verify that Chain is selected. and click OK. Creating Detail Wiring | 339 .Electrical Power Riser Diagram is highlighted.113 North view. Under Modify Subcategories. 9 Beginning at the transformer. Draw linework to create a wiring diagram 5 In the drawing area. 2 Close the Project Browser. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. as shown. Zoom in as necessary and use the drag controls to make sure the lines clean up properly. zoom in to the service transformer (T-SVC) located at the bottom left of the Power Riser . and then click OK. expand Lines. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click New.rvt. notice that there are no snaps active. Create a linetype 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Sheets (all) ➤ E101 .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. for Name. In the New Subcategory dialog. draw lines to represent the wiring to the switchboard (SWB). 7 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Element panel. enter Electrical Power. In the Line Styles dialog. indicating that it’s the active view. and select Electrical Power from the Type Selector drop-down. select 6. As you draw. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_02_i. This maximizes the drawing window so that you can more easily add wiring to the riser diagram. 3 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Line Styles. for Line Weight.

as shown. for Offset.10 Press Esc. 340 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 14 Click to place lines offset to the right and above the first 2 lines from the switchboard. enter 1/8". add lines to represent wiring between the switchboard and a panel on level 3 (MDP_3). 13 On the Options Bar. 11 Using the same method. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset.

17 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. 19 Select the horizontal line to the right of the first line.15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. TIP When you use the Trim tool. Creating Detail Wiring | 341 . 18 Select the vertical detail line that connects into MDP_2 as the first line to trim. so that the result is as shown. you select the portion of the line that you want to keep. 16 Draw a line to connect the offset line to MDP_2.

and then copy them to multiple locations in the diagram. Add a break symbol and note You create the break symbol and text note once. 342 | Chapter 15 Detailing .20 Continue adding detail lines until the diagram is wired as shown. 21 Zoom in to panel MP-1B.

and use the drag controls to resize the text box and position it as shown. 27 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 23 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Start-End-Radius Arc). and type SEE MECHANICAL CONNECTION SCHEDULE.22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. Copy the symbol and text 30 Select the text. as shown. The name of the detail arc (Start-End-Radius) indicates the order in which you select the defining points of the arc. 24 Draw a “cap” (the break symbol) over the 3 vertical lines at the top of the panel. Creating Detail Wiring | 343 . 29 Click Modify. and select 3/32" Arial Transparent from the Type Selector drop-down. 28 Click above the cap. 26 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ No Leader. and then click Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Center). 25 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.

select the text and the detail arc of the break symbol. 34 Click the endpoint of the left vertical line under the break symbol as the copy start point. 35 Click the endpoint of each of the corresponding lines for the other 2 mechanical panels (MP-2B and MP-3B) as the copy endpoints. 344 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 33 On the Options Bar. 32 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. select Multiple.31 While pressing Ctrl.

5. 41 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. click to specify the start point of the first horizontal line.36 Press Esc. 42 On the Options Bar. 43 Click twice to place 2 more lines below the first line. 38 Beginning below the level 1 switchboard. 40 Press Esc. enter 0 0. and then press Esc. and press Enter. enter 3/32". Create a ground wire You use 3 detail lines to create a ground wire symbol. 37 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. You enter exact values for each line length. 39 Move the cursor to the right. for Offset. Creating Detail Wiring | 345 .

change the length of the bottom line to 0 0.44 Edit the offset lines: ■ ■ ■ Select the middle line. drag the Modify Group Origin control to the midpoint of the top detail line. you can ensure that they stay together. 346 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select all 3 lines. Notice that the new Ground group displays in the Project Browser. enter 0 0. You can also specify the origin point of the group so that it is placed accurately. Press Esc. enter Ground. and then press Esc. Using the same method. Create a detail group By grouping the lines that represent the ground wire. for Name. and press Enter. 46 In the Project Browser. 47 In the drawing area. 50 With the group selected. while pressing Ctrl. expand Groups ➤ Detail. 48 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group.125. 49 In the Create Detail Group dialog. 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ Project Browser to open the browser view. click on the length dimension value.25. and click OK.

53 Click the origin of the detail group as the move start point. draw a detail line that extends from the bottom right of the switchboard. 56 Draw a detail line to connect each ground wire group to its transformer. 54 Select the group. 52 Select the detail group. and then click the endpoint of the detail line as the move end point. and TP-3B) to place the ground wire group in those locations. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. 55 Click below each of the transformers (TP-1B.51 Using the method learned previously. Creating Detail Wiring | 347 . and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. TP-2B.

and will place it on sheet E01. 59 Close the file with or without saving it. Prepare the view 1 In the Project Browser.Pin wires and view You pin the view and all detail lines so that they don’t get moved accidentally. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select the entire Electrical Riser Power Diagram viewport. for Name. you will create the Mechanical Connection Schedule referenced here. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. You use a view template to isolate the mechanical components so that you can annotate the detail components.rvt. 58 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. 57 Using a crossing window (beginning at lower left and extending to upper right). 4 Right-click the ViewCube. you duplicate an existing view and orient it to a section view in order to create an isometric detail view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 5 Zoom in to view the section. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Duct & Equipment. 2 Right-click the copy. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail In this exercise. 348 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and click Rename. 3 In the Rename View dialog. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_03_i. click Training Files. and click Orient to View ➤ Sections ➤ Typical Make Up Air. In later exercises. enter Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. and click OK.

click Home. and then click the corner where the Top.6 Select the section box. and Left sides converge. and drag the top grip down so that the section includes only the first floor. Back. and then press Esc. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 349 . 7 On the ViewCube.

and click Apply View Template. select 3D Views. Annotate the view 11 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Walkthroughs. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. Hide elements in a view 10 Select the long rectangular duct at the rear. Under Names. 350 | Chapter 15 Detailing . right-click. and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down.Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser. 9 In the View Templates dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Show Type. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. Click OK. You hide this duct because it’s not part of the detail being created. select 3D HVAC Iso. 12 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. This isolates the mechanical components by turning off the architectural components. right-click Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail.

Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 351 . label the connecting duct 8x8 Makeup Air to Return Plenum (Provide Motorized Damper). click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: 18 Press Esc. Typical. as shown. (Right). 16 Select the text for the 8x8 duct. Move the cursor to the left and click to specify the text insertion point. Change text alignment 17 With the text still selected. and click to specify the second leader point. and drag the controls to resize the text box as shown. Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Enter Makeup Air Duct from AHU-1.14 Place the label: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click on the long rectangular duct to start the leader. Move the cursor down and to the left. 15 Using the same method. 19 Complete the text labels.

type VP to open the instance properties for the view. 28 Drag the new isometric view from the Project Browser onto the sheet. and under Extents. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. open Sheets (all) ➤ M601-HVAC DUCT PLAN & SECTIONS. and use the drag controls to position the boundaries around the detail. as shown. 26 Zoom to the drawing extents.To rotate and reposition a text label. select Crop View and clear Crop Region Visible. 24 Access the instance properties for the view. Modify the view 20 In the drawing area. 22 Zoom out so that the isometric detail and the crop region are both visible. select Crop Region Visible. Place the view on a sheet 27 In the Project Browser. 352 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select the label and use the Drag and Rotate controls that display. and then click OK. under Extents. 25 Click OK. 23 Click on the crop region.

Drafting Detail Components In this exercise. select the isometric view. 3 In the Project Browser. Work with a filled region that represents a detail component. Drafting Detail Components | 353 . Annotate the drafting view using keynotes and text notes. Place a detail component. and then select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. 30 Close the file with or without saving it. Use detail lines to create a detail group. By defining a Sub-Discipline and a View Classification. Click OK. click Training Files. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select 3" = 1'-0". right-click the view name. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. For Scale.rvt. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_04_i. The new view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Drafting Views (Detail).29 In the drawing area. and click Properties. you can more accurately locate the view in the Project Browser hierarchy. Create a drafting view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Drafting View. enter Typical Floor Drain Detail.

for Sub-Discipline. 14 Drag the cursor down and to the left so that the rectangle is 1' 8" x 5 1/2". 13 In the drawing area. Click OK. 354 | Chapter 15 Detailing . click the point at the top of the drain. 12 On the Element panel. Use a filled region to create a concrete slab 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Region drop-down ➤ Region. select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 8 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 9 Zoom in to the component. 7 Click in the middle of the drawing area to place the component. 6 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Element panel. and select Floor Drain with Waterproofing-Section from the Type Selector drop-down. select Documentation. Place a floor drain detail component 5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. Notice the new location of the view in the Project Browser. as the rectangle start point. as shown. For View Classification. select Plumbing. 11 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Rectangle).4 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics.

16 In the Instance Properties dialog. Modify the boundary of the filled region You edit the boundary of the concrete slab so that it matches the contour of the metal deck. (Line). 18 With the filled region still selected. click the bottom left corner of the filled region to specify the group insertion point. Add a structural metal deck detail group 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Group drop-down ➤ Place Detail Group. and click OK. for Type.P. 25 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ 26 Zoom to the lower left corner of the filled region. and then press Esc. Concrete. select C. 24 Click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Edit Boundary. select the filled region. 22 Click Modify.I. 20 Select 1.5 NR 18 from the Type Selector drop-down. 17 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Region panel ➤ Finish Region. click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Arrange ➤ Send to Back drop-down ➤ Send to Back. Drafting Detail Components | 355 . click to select the indicated points in succession from left to right to define the new boundary. 23 In the drawing area. 21 In the drawing area. 27 Using the following illustration as a guide.15 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Region Properties.

356 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and then select the base of the slab to the right of the line. 32 Click point 1 to specify it as the start point. select Multiple. 29 Highlight one of the lines you just drew. 35 Draw a line from the end of the last copied boundary line down to the base of the slab. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. and then click to select them. 37 Select the small vertical line you just drew. 33 Click the endpoint of the copied chain as the start point for the next chain. and then click point 6 as the endpoint. 31 On the Options Bar. 34 Press Esc.28 Click Modify. 30 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 36 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim.

draw a rectangle on top of the filled region. as shown. 39 Select the line between points 1 and 2. and then select the side of the slab above the line. (Rectangle). The boundary of the slab now matches the contour of the metal deck. Create a floor component 42 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. and then press Esc. Drafting Detail Components | 357 . 40 Click Finish Region.38 Pan to the other end of the slab. 44 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ This represents the vinyl composition flooring. 43 Select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 41 Type ZF to zoom out. 45 Using the method learned previously.

49 Click Modify. enter Flashing Membrane_F.Create a detail group 46 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. Modify the group origin point 53 In the drawing area.D.. press Tab to highlight the chain. for Name. 54 Drag the origin point so that it snaps to the right endpoint of the detail lines. draw wide detail lines as shown. as shown. and then click to select them. 358 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 51 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. 48 Using the existing thin line as a guide. and click OK. 52 In the Create Group dialog. select the Flashing Membrane group. 47 Select Wide Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 50 Highlight one of the wide lines. Notice that the origin point of the group is at the center.

59 Press Spacebar 3 times to orient the component correctly. 60 Click the midpoint of the drain to specify the breakline location. as shown. 61 Using the same method. 58 Select Break Line from the Type Selector drop-down. Drafting Detail Components | 359 . 57 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. add a breakline at the midpoint of the slab’s left edge. Add breaklines 56 Type ZO to zoom out.55 Press Esc.

70 In the Keynotes dialog. 66 Select Keynote Text from the Type Selector drop-down. select Leader and Free End. select Division 22 ➤ 22 13 00 ➤ 22 13 16 ➤ 22 13 16. 67 On the Options Bar. 360 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Add a keynote You begin annotating the detail components by adding a keynote for the floor drain object. 64 Press Esc twice. 65 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Keynote drop-down ➤ User. 68 Select the top of the drain as the object to tag. and use the grips to resize the masking region. Modify breakline boundaries 63 Select the left breakline. 72 If necessary. and then click OK. 69 Click twice to place the leader as shown. select the keynote and drag the text to the right. 71 Click Modify. as shown.A1 Floor Drain W/O Waterproofing.62 Press Esc twice.

75 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Right). 79 Enter Adjustable Nickel Bronze Strainer with 4” Flange.Add text notes You add text notes to continue annotating the view. 73 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and click to specify the second leader point. 81 Select the text note. and use the drag controls to resize and move the text box as shown. and click to specify the text insertion point. 78 Move the cursor to the left. Drafting Detail Components | 361 . 80 Press Esc twice. 76 To select the leader start point. 77 Move the cursor up and to the left. click in the area indicated by the left arrow in the following image. and then click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 74 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments.

82 Continue annotating the detail. Add dimensions You add a dimension with multiple references. as shown. 84 Using the following image as a guide. 83 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. 362 | Chapter 15 Detailing . click to select the slab lines in the order indicated.

89 Select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down.85 Click to the left of the slab to place the dimension line. 91 Close the file with or without saving it. select the view title. 90 Press Esc. open P103 . Drafting Detail Components | 363 . Place the detail on a sheet 86 In the Project Browser. and click to place it. 88 In the drawing area. 87 Drag Typical Floor Drain Detail from the Project Browser to the top center of the sheet.Plumbing Part Plans & Details. and then press Esc twice.

select Black and White. and select Roof Drain Overflow Imperial. select Auto-Detect. select Visible. 7 On the Imported Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Category. you import a CAD detail drawing. Import a CAD detail drawing 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Click Insert tab ➤ Import panel ➤ Import CAD. double-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Plumbing ➤ Drafting Views (Detail) ➤ Roof Drain Overflow Detail to make it the active view. For A-----NPP. Modify the CAD drawing line weight 5 Zoom to the left side of the detail. for Line Weight. For Colors. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Importing a CAD Drawing In this exercise. click Training Files. expand Roof Drains Overflow Imperial. Click Open. 364 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 6 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. select 3. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_05_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog. ■ ■ ■ ■ 4 Type ZF to zoom the view.dwg. Click OK. For Import units. For Layers. 3 In the Import CAD Formats dialog: ■ Navigate to Training\Imperial\06_Construction Documentation. and modify line weight properties in the imported drawing.rvt.

select the viewport title.Plumbing Part Plans & Details. 13 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel.8 Type ZF. 15 Close the file with or without saving it. 11 Press Esc. open P103 . 12 In the drawing area. 14 Drag the title to the small space below the viewport. 10 Drag Roof Drain Overflow Detail from the Project Browser to the upper right of the sheet. and then press Esc. and select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. Place the detail on a sheet 9 In the Project Browser. Importing a CAD Drawing | 365 .

366 .

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful